Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Short Answer Questions

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Short Answer Questions

Question 1. Photoelectric current continues when the anode is even at a slight negative potential concerning the photocathode. Explain.
Answer:

Emitted photoelectrons possess some initial kinetic energy. Hence, a few electrons can reach the anode overcoming the repulsive force of the negative potential. If the value of the negative potential is not too high, the photoelectric current continues to flow

Question 2. When radiation of wavelength 2000A° is incident on a nickel plate, the plate gets positively charged. But when the wavelength of Incident radiation is raised to 3440 A°, the plate remains neutral. Explain
Answer:

The photoelectric effect takes place for incident radiation of wavelength 2000A and due to the emission of photoelectrons, the plate becomes positively charged. No photoelectric effect takes place when radiation of wavelength 3440A is incident on the plate, as the threshold wavelength for photoelectric effect is more than 2000 A but less than 3440A

Question 3. Give examples of the production of

  1. An electron by a photon and
  2. Photon by an electron.

Answer:

  1. When a photon is incident on the metal surface, the electron is emitted in a photoelectric effect.
  2. In the process of production of X-rays, when high-speed electrons in cathode rays are incident on a metal surface, an X-ray photon is emitted.

(Hence photoelectric effect and X-ray production are two opposite site effects)

Key Concepts in Dual Nature of Radiation

Question 4. A metal plate that emits photoelectrons under the influence of blue light, may not emit photoelectrons under the influence of red light. Explain.
Answer:

  • For the emission of electrons from a metal surface, the frequency of the incident light should be higher than the threshold frequency ofthe metal.
  • The frequency of blue light is greater than the frequency of red light.
  • If the frequency of blue light is higher than the threshold frequency for the metal, electrons will be emitted.
  • But if the frequency of red light is less than the threshold frequency, red light will not be able to emit electrons from that metal surface

Read And Learn More WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

Question 5. Radiation of frequency 1015 Hz is Incident separately on two photosensitive surfaces P and Q. The following observations were made:

  1. Surface P: Photoemission occurs but the photoelectrons have zero kinetic energy
  2. Surface Q: Photoemission occurs and electrons have non-zero kinetic energy.

Question 6. Which of these two has a higher work function? If the frequency of incident light Is reduced, what will happen to photoelectron emission In the two cases?
Answer:

The energy of the incident photon, hf = Ek + W0; here W0 – work function of the emitting surface, and Ek = kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectron

Given, for the surface P, Ek = 0; but for the surface Q, Ek> 0. For the same incident light, hf= constant. So the work function W0 is higher for the surface P.

If incident light of a lower frequency is taken, he would reduce. Then it would be less than the work function of the surface P; so, this surface would emit no photoelectron. The surface Q may emit photoelectrons, provided hf > W0 for that surface

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation saqs

Short Answer Questions on Dual Nature of Matter

Question 7. State two important properties of photons which
Answer:

The properties of photons used to write Einstein’s photoelectric equation are

  1. The rest mass of the photon is zero,
  2. The energy ofthe photon is E = hv

Question 8. An electron (charge = e, mass = m ) is accelerated from rest through a potential difference of V volt. What will be the de Broglie wavelength ofthe electron?
Answer:

The kinetic energy gained by the electron

= eV = ½mv²

Or, v = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 e V}{m}}\)

Hence, de Broglie wavelength,

λ = \(\frac{h}{m \nu}=\frac{h}{m} \sqrt{\frac{m}{2 e V}}\)

= \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m e V}}\)

Question 9. When light incident on a metal ha* energy le** than the work function of the metal, then no electron h emitted from the surface of the metal. Mathematically justify this statement
Answer:

Einstein’s photoelectric equation,

½mv²max = hf – W0 = work function

If hf < W0, the maximum kinetic energy of electrons (½mv²max )is negative and so v²max   is negative. However, the magnitude of the square of a physical quantity cannot be negative. Hence photoelectrons are not emitted from the surface ofthe metal

Question 10. Is matter wave an electromagnetic wave?
Answer:

No, matter wave is not an electromagnetic wave, because the matter waves are not associated with periodic vibrations of the electric and magnetic fields

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 11. A beam of photons of energy 5.0 eV falls on a free metal surface of work function 3.0 eV. As soon as the photo-electrons are emitted, they are removed. But the emission comes to a stop after a while explain the reasons, i
Answer:

When the photons of energy 5.0 eV fall on a free metal surface of work function 3.0 eV, electrons are emitted from the surface instantaneously and the surface becomes positively charged. After a while, the number of free electrons in the metal surface decreases and more energy is required for the emission of electrons from the metal surface, i.e., the work function of the metal increases.

When the work function becomes greater than 5.0 eV, the photons of energy 5.0 eV are not able to eject electrons from the metal surface. So, the emission of electrons ceases after some time. To overcome this difficulty/the metal surface is connected to a negative pole of an electric source to make it negatively charged.

Question 12. Does the photoelectric emission take place due to the incidence of visible light and ultraviolet rays on the faces of different types of metals in our everyday experience?
Answer:

Yes, the photoelectric emission does take place. But in the absence of any positively charged collector, the emitted photoelectrons accumulate on the metal surface and make a layer of negative charges. Within a very short period, the emission of photoelectrons comes to a stop due to the repulsion of the negatively charged layer. Hence the photoelectric emission stops after a while

Question 13. Why the photoelectric emission can not be performed by using X-rays and gamma rays?
Answer:

When a photon of sufficient energy falls on a metal surface, the photon vanishes by imparting all its energy to an electron and the electron comes out of the metal surface. This phenomenon is known as the photoelectric effect. But in the case of X-rays and gamma rays, the photon energy is too high for the electron of the metal to absorb so that the photon, is not annihilated by imparting its whole energy to an electron. Hence the photoelectric emission does not take place with X-ray or gamma-ray photons.

Question 14. What is the relation of the de Broglie wavelength of a moving particle with temperature?
Answer:

If the thermal energy is not a source of kinetic of a proving,partic)e, then the de Broglie wavelength of that particle is independent of the temperature. Hence the de Broglie wavelength emitted particles in photoelectric effect radioactive radiation etc. have no relation with temperature. T is given by v ∝ \(\nu \propto \sqrt{T}\).

Therefore, the de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\lambda=\frac{h}{m v} \quad \text { or, } \lambda \propto \frac{1}{\sqrt{T}}\)

Real-Life Applications of Wave-Particle Duality

Question 15. The threshold frequency for a certain, metal is 3.3 × 10 14 Hz. If the light of frequency 8.2 × 10 -14 Hz is incident on the metal, predict the cut-off voltage for the photoelectric emission.
Answer:

We know, eV0 = hf-hf0

Or, V0 = \(\frac{h}{e}\left(f-f_0\right)\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}\left(8.2 \times 10^{14}-3.3 \times 10^{14}\right)}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= 2.03V

Question 16. What is the de Broglie wavelength of a bullet of mass 0.040 kg traveling at the speed of 1.0 km s-1?
Answer:

Here, m = 0.04 J kg, v = 1.0 km. s-1  = 103 m. s-1

∴ λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{0.040 \times 10^3}\)

= 1.66 ×10-35m

Question 17. Every metal has a definite work function. Why do all photoelectrons not come out with the same energy if incident radiation is monochromatic?
Answer:

The work function of a metal is the minimum energy required to knock out an electron from the highest Tilled level of the conduction band. The conduction band comprises different energy levels forming a continuous band of levels. Electrons in different energy levels need different energy for emission. Thus, the electron, once emitted has different kinetic energies depending on the energy supplied to the emitter.

Question 18. Write the expression for the de Broglie wavelength associated with a charged particle having charge q and mass m, when it is accelerated by a potential V.
Answer:

Kinetic energy acquired, E = qV

Momentum, p = \(\sqrt{2 m E}=\sqrt{2 m q V}\)

So, de Broglie wavelength, λ =  \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m q V}}\)

Common Questions on Photoelectric Effect

Question 19. If light of wavelength 412.5 nm is incident on each of the metals given in the table, which ones will show photoelectric emission and why?
Answer:

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Metal And Work Function

The energy of incident light,

E = 12400/λ(in Å)

= \(\frac{12400}{4125}\)

= 3 eV

Na and K will show photoelectric emission because their work functions are less than the energy of incident light

Question 20. Does the stopping potential depend on

  1. The intensity and
  2. The frequency of the incident light? Explain

Answer:

  1. Stopping potential does not depend on the intensity of the incident light.
  2. Stopping potential Is directly proportional to the frequency of the incident light

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Question And Answers

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Long Questions And Answers

Question 1. The kinetic energy of a proton is the same as that of an α  -particle. What is the ratio of their respective de Broglie wavelengths?
Answer:

Kinetic energy

E = ½mv²=  \(\frac{1}{2} m v^2=\frac{(m v)^2}{2 m}\)

Or, mv = \(\sqrt{2 m E}\)

Hence, de Broglie wavelength,

λ = \(\frac{h^2}{m v}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

Since the kinetic energy of a proton equals that of a-parade

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}=\sqrt{\frac{m_2}{m_1}}=\sqrt{\frac{4}{1}}\)

= \(\frac{2}{1}\)

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Long Question And Answers

Question 2. What should be the percentage increase or decrease of kinetic energy of an electron so that its de Broglie wavelength is halved?
Answer:

Kinetic energy, E = \(\frac{p^2}{2 m}\)

[p = momentum]

∴ p = \(\sqrt{2 m E}\)

de Broglie wavelength = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

∴ \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}=\sqrt{\frac{E_2}{E_1}}\)

Here \(\lambda_2=\frac{\lambda_1}{2}\) Or, \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}\) = 2

Hence \(\sqrt{\frac{E_2}{E_1}}\) = 2 Or, E2 = 4E1

∴ Increase in kinetic energy

= \(\frac{E_2-E_1}{E_1} \times 100 \%\) × 100%

= \(\frac{4 E_1-E_1}{E_1} \times 100 \%\) × 100%

= 300%

Question 3. The kinetic energy of a free electron is doubled. By how many times, would its de Broglie wavelength increase
Answer:

Kinetic energy, E = \(\frac{p^2}{2 m}\) [p= momentum of electron]

∴ p = \(\sqrt{2 m E}\)

de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

i.e \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}=\sqrt{\frac{E_2}{E_1}} \text { or, } \lambda_2=\lambda_1 \sqrt{\frac{E_1}{E_2}}\)

=  \(\lambda_1 \sqrt{\frac{1}{2}}=\frac{\lambda_1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Hence, de Broglie wavelength will be \(\) times Original One.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Question And Answers

Dual Nature of Matter Q&A WBCHSE

Question 4. Energy of a photon = E; kinetic energy of a proton is also the same as energy of the photon. The corresponding wavelength of the photon and de Broglie wavelength of the proton are λ1 and λ2, respectively. What is the relation between E and the ratio of λ1 and λ2? 
Answer:

In the case of photon, E = hf = hc/λ1

Or, λ1 = hc/E

In case of proton, E = \(\frac{p^2}{2 m}\) [p = momentum of proton]

Hence, p = \(\sqrt{2 m E}\) and, \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

i.e \(\frac{\lambda_2}{\lambda_1}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}} \cdot \frac{E}{h c}\)

= \(\frac{1}{c} \sqrt{\frac{E}{2 m}} \quad \text { or, } \frac{\lambda_2}{\lambda_1} \propto \sqrt{E}\)

Question 5. Distinguish between matter wave and light wave
Answer:

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Electromagnetic Waves And Matter Waves

Question 6. The maximum kinetic energies of photoelectrons emitted from a metal surface when illuminated by radiations of wavelengths λ1 and λ2 are K1 and K2, respectively. If λ1 = 3λ2, show that,\(K_1<\frac{K_2}{3}\)
Answer:

If the work function of the metal is W, from Einstein’s equation

K1 = \(K_1=\frac{h c}{\lambda_1}-W \text { and } K_2=\frac{h c}{\lambda_2}-W\) – W

Hence,K1  – \(K_1-\frac{K_2}{3}=h c\left(\frac{1}{\lambda_1}-\frac{1}{3 \lambda_2}\right)-W+\frac{W}{3}\)

= hc. 0 –  \(\frac{2 W}{3}\)

Since λ1=  3λ2

= – \(\frac{2 W}{3}\)<0

K1 < \(\frac{K_2}{3}\)

Question 7. A proton and an electron have the same kinetic energy. Which one has a larger de Broglie wavelength?
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength, λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m K}}\)

Since h and K are constants, λ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{m}}\)

If I and mp are the masses of an electron and a proton respectively.

Then,  \(\frac{\lambda_e}{\lambda_p}=\sqrt{\frac{m_p}{m_e}}>1\)

∴ λe > λp

So, the de Broglie wavelength of electrons is greater

WBCHSE Physics Questions on Wave-Particle Duality

Question 8. A proton and an electron have the same de Broglie wave¬ length. Which one has higher kinetic energy?
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength,

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m K}}\) [ K= kinetic energy]

Or, mK = \(\frac{h^2}{2 \lambda^2}\)

For the same λ, mK = constant

i.e \(K \propto \frac{1}{m} \quad \text { or, } \frac{K_e}{K_p}=\frac{m_p}{m_e}>1\)

∴ Ke>Kp

∴  Electron has higher kinetic energy.

Question 9. A photon and an electron have the same de Broglie wavelength. Which one has greater total energy?
Answer:

The total energy of a photon of wavelength λ is given by

Ep = hf = hc/λ ……………………………………………… (1)

de Broglie wavelength J of an electron (same as bf photon) of mass m moving with velocity v is given by

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v} \text { or, } m=\frac{h}{\lambda v}\)

The total energy of electron of mass m

Ee = mc²  (According to the theory of relativity)

= \(\frac{h c^2}{\lambda v}\) ………………………………… (2)

Dividing equation (2) by equation (1) we hive

⇒ \(\frac{E_e}{E_p}=\frac{\frac{h c^2}{\lambda v}}{\frac{h c}{\lambda}}=\frac{c}{v}\)

Since c>c.

∴ Ee >Ep

So the total energy of the electron is greater than that of a photon

Essential Q&A on Dual Nature of Matter WBCHSE

Question 10. Find the exp-session of de Broglie wavelength of a particle moving with a velocity close to the velocity of light.
Answer:

When a particle moves with a velocity v close to the velocity of light c, then the effective mass of the particle

m = \(\frac{m_0}{\sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}\)

Where mQ = rest mass of the particle

Hence, the de Broglie wavelength associated with the particle is

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h \sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}}{m_0 v}\)

= \(\frac{h}{m_0 v} \sqrt{1-\frac{v^2}{c^2}}\)

Question 11. If another the speed particle of anis 3v, electron ratio iso f the v and de Brogliethe speed wavelength of the electron to that of the particle Is 104/8.13. Is the particle a proton or an α  particle? Justify your answer
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength, λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)

[ h = Planck’s constant]

∴ For the electron and the other particle

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}=\frac{m_2}{m_1} \cdot \frac{v_2}{v_1}\)

Or, = \(\frac{m_2}{m_1}=\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2} \cdot \frac{v_1}{v_2}=\frac{10^4}{8.13} \times \frac{v}{3 v}\)

= \(\frac{410}{1}\)

∴ The other particle is 410 times heavier than an electron. It is neither a proton nor an α-particle

Question 12. Prove that the product of the slope of the V0-f graph and electronic charge gives the value of Planck’s constant.
Answer:

From Einstein’s photoelectric equation, we know that,

½mv² = hf – W0

But, ½mv²max  = eV0

∴ eV0 = hf – W0

Or,  \(\frac{h}{e} f-\frac{W_0}{e}\) ………………………………………….. (1)

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Slope Of V And f Graph

So the plot of stopping potential ( V0) versus frequency (f) will be a straight line

Comparing equation (1) with (the equation of a straight line y = mx + c, we get the slope of V0– f graph m = h/e

Planks constant h = me

Question 13.  The given graphs show the variation of photoelectric current (I) with the applied voltage ( V) when light of different Intensi¬ ties Is Incident on surfaces of different materials Identify the pairs of curves that correspond to different materials but the same intensity of incident radiations.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Variation Of Photoelectric Current

Answer:

Stopping potential depends on the material of the photocathode, but Is independent of the Intensity of the Incident radiation. So the pairs (1,3) and (2, 4) correspond to different materials but the same Intensity of incident radiation.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 14. The potential energy U of a moving particle of mass m varies with x as shown In the figure. The de Broglie wavelengths of the particle In the regions 0 <x< 1 and x > 1 are λ1 and λ2 respectively. If £ the total energy of the particle Is nE, find λ12

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Potential Energy Of U

Answer:

Total energy =nE = potential energy + kinetic energy

In the region 0 < x < 1, potential energy, U1= E

∴ Kinetic energy Is K1 = nE- E = (n- 1 )E

∴ de Broglie wavelength,

λ1=  \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m K_1}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m(n-1) E}}\) ………………………………………….(1)

In the region x > 1 , potential energy, U2 = 0

Kinetic energy, K2 = nE- 0 = nE

de Broglie wavelength

λ2 = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m K_2}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m n E}}\)………………………………..(2)

From equations (1) and (2) we get

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m(n-1) E}} \times \frac{\sqrt{2 m n E}}{h}\)

= \(\sqrt{\frac{n}{n-1}}\)

Question 15. Monochromatic light of wavelength 632.8 nm Is produced by a helium-neon laser. The power emitted is 9.42 mW.

  1. Find the energy and momentum of each photon in the light beam.
  2. How many photons per second, on average, arrive at a target irradiated by this beam? (Assume the entire beam to be incident on a small area of the target)
  3. What should be the velocity of a hydrogen atom to have the same momentum ofthe photon?

Answer:

1. Wavelength, λ  = 632.8 nm = 632.8 × 10 -9m

∴ The energy of each photon

E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{632.8 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 3.14 × 10-19 J and momentum

p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{632.8 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 1.05 × 10-27 kg. m. s-1

2. Emission power

P = 9.42 mW = 9.42 × 10 -19 W

Number of photons emitted per second

n = \(\frac{P}{E}=\frac{9.42 \times 10^{-3}}{3.14 \times 10^{-19}}\)

3. Mass of hydrogen atom

= Mass of proton = 1.67 × 10 -27 kg

∴ Velocity of the hydrogen atom

= \(\frac{\text { momentum of photon }}{\text { mass of hydrogen }}=\frac{1.05 \times 10^{-27}}{1.67 \times 10^{-27}}\)

= 0.63 m. s-1

Question 16. The energy flux of sunlight reaching the surface of the earth is 1.388 × 103 W .m-2. How many photons (nearly) per square meter are incident on the earth per second? Assume that the photons in the sunlight have an average wavelength of 550 nm.

Wavelength, μ  = 550 nm = 550 × 10 -9  m

Energy flux, Φ= 1.388 × 10 3 W .m-2

The energy of each photon,

E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{550 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 3.61× 10 -19J

∴ Number of photons incident on earth per square meter per second,

n = \(\frac{\phi}{E}=\frac{1.388 \times 10^3}{3.61 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= 3.85 × 10 21

Question 17. The work function for a certain metal is 4.2 eV. Will this metal give photoelectric emission for incident radiation of wavelength 330 nm?
Answer:

Work function, W0 = 4.2 eV = 6.72 × 10-19 J

Threshold frequency, f0  = \(\frac{W_0}{h}\)

⇒ \(\frac{6.72 \times 10^{-19}}{6.606 \times 10^{-34}}\)

= 1.101 × 1015 Hz

∴ Threshold wavelength,

λ0 = \(=\frac{6.72 \times 10^{-19}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}\)

= \(\frac{c}{f_0}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1.01 \times 10^{15}}\)

= 297 nm

∴ λ0 < λ

Where λ = incident wavelength

i.e f0 >f

∴ Photoelectric emission is not possible in this case.

Practice Questions for Dual Nature of Radiation

Question 18. Light of wavelength 488 nm is produced by an argon laser which is used in the photoelectric effect. When light from this spectral line is incident on the cathode, the stopping (cut-off) potential of photoelectrons Is 0.38 y and the work functional the material from which staff cathode Ht made

Frequency of Incidental light,

f = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{488 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 6.15 × 1014 Hz

∴ Work function,

W0 = hf-eV0

= 6.626 × 10-34 × 6.15 × 104 – 1.6 × 10-19 × 0.38

= 3.467 × 10-19 J = 2.167.eV

Question 19. The wavelength of light from the spectral emission line of sodium is 589 nm. Find the kinetic energy at which

  1. An electron and
  2. A neutron would have the same de Broglie wavelength

Answer:

de Broglie wavelength, A = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

Or, E = \(\text { or, } E=\frac{1}{2 m} \cdot \frac{h^2}{\lambda^2}\)

1. The kinetic energy of the electron

Ee= \(\frac{1}{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31}} \times\left(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{589 \times 10^{-9}}\right)^2\)

= 6.95 ×10-25 J

2. Kinetic energy of neutron

En=  \(\frac{1}{2 \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27}} \times\left(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{589 \times 10^{-9}}\right)^2\)

= 3.79 ×10-28J

Question 20. The wavelength of each photon and electron is 1.00 nm, Find their

  1. Momentum and
  2. Energy.

Answer:

1. Momentum, p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\)

Or, p = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{1 \times 10^{-9}}\)

= 6.626 ×10-25J kg. m. s-1

2. Energy of photon

E = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{10^{-9}}\)

= 1.24 keV

The kinetic energy of the electron

½mv² = \(\frac{p^2}{2 m}\)

= \(\frac{\left(6.626 \times 10^{-25}\right)^2}{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31}} \mathrm{~J}\)

= 1.51

Question 21. The average kinetic energy of a neutron at 300 K is \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT.  Find Its do Broglie wavelength.
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m k T}}\)

Since E = \(\frac{3}{2}\) KT

= \(=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(3 \times 1.67 \times 10^{-27} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300\right)^{1 / 2}}\)

K = 1.38 × 10-23

= 1.456A°

Question 22. What is the dc Broglie wavelength of a nitrogen molecule at 300 K ? Assume the molecule is moving with its rms speed. (Atomic mass of nitrogen = 14.0076 u J)
Answer:

vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 k T}{m}}\)

de Broglie wavelength of nitrogen molecule

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v_{\mathrm{rms}}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m k T}}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(3 \times 28.0152 \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300\right)^{1 / 2}}\)

= 0.275 ×10-10 m

Question 23. In an accelerator experiment on high-energy collisions of electrons with positrons, a certain event Is interpreted as the annihilation of an electron-positron pair of total energy 10.2 GeV into two ϒ – rays of equal energy. What is the wavelength associated with each γ-  ray ( lGeV = 109 eV )
Answer:

The energy of two γ-  ray = 10.2 GeV

∴ A Energy of each γ-  ray = 5.1 GeV = 5.1 ×109eV

λ = \(\frac{h c}{E}=\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{5.1 \times 10^9 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= 2.44 ×10-16 m

Short Answer Questions on Wave-Particle Duality

Question 24. Estimating the following two numbers should be interesting. The first number will tell you why radio engineers need not worry much about photons! The second number tells you why our eye can never ‘count photons! even In barely detectable light.

  1. The number of photons emitted per second by a medium wave transmitter of 10 kW power, emitting radiowaves of wave-length 500 m
  2. The number of photons entering the pupil of our eye per second corresponds to the minimum intensity of white light that we humans can perceive (-10-10W.m-2). Take the area ofthe pupil to be about 0.4 cm2 and the average frequency of white light to be about 6 ×1014 Hz.

Answer:

1. Number of photons emitted per second,

n = \(n=\frac{\text { power of transmitter }}{\text { energy of each photon }}\)

= \(\frac{P}{h c / \lambda}=\frac{10^4 \times 500}{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}\)

= 2.52 ×1031

This number is so very large that radio engineers need not worry much about photons.

2. Minimum intensity, I = 10-10 W.m-2

Area of pupil = 0.4 cm2 = 0.4 ×10-4m2

Average frequency, f  = 6 × 10-4 Hz

E = hf = 6.626 ×10-34 × 6 × 1014

= 3.98 ×10-19J

∴ Number of photons incident on the eye,

n = \(\frac{I A}{E}=\frac{10^{-10} \times 0.4 \times 10^{-4}}{3.98 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= 1.01 × 104

This is quite a small number, but still large enough to be counted

Question 25. Monochromatic radiation of wavelength 640.2 nm? from a neon lamp irradiates photosensitive material made of calcium or tungsten. The stopping voltage is measured to be 0.54 V. The source is replaced by an iron source and its 427.2 nm line irradiates the same photocell. Predict the new stopping voltage
Answer:

The work function of the photoelectric cell

W0 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\)eV0

= \(\left(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{640.2 \times 10^{-9}}-1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 0.54\right)\)

= 1.40 eV

In the second case, A = 427.2 nm

V0 = \(\frac{1}{e}\left(\frac{h c}{\lambda}-W_0\right)\)

= \(\frac{1}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) \(\times\left(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{427.2 \times 10^{-9}}-2.24 \times 10^{-19}\right)\)

= 1.51 V

Question 26. An electron microscope uses electrons accelerated by a voltage of 50 kV. determine the die deBroglie wavelength associated with the electrons. If other factors (such as numerical aperture etc.) are taken to be roughly the same, how does the resolving power of an electron microscope compare with that of an optical microscope with yellow light?
Answer:

Wavelength of electron

λe = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m e V}}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \times 50 \times 10^3\right)^{\frac{1}{2}}} \mathrm{~m}\)

= 0.0549 A°

∴ Resolving power of a microscope ∝  1/ λ

The wavelength of yellow light, λy = 5900 A°

∴ \(\quad \frac{\text { resolving power of electron microscope }}{\text { resolving power of optical microscope }}\)

= \(\frac{\lambda_y}{\lambda_e}=\frac{5900}{0.0549}\)

= 1.07 × 105

Question 27. Find the typical de Broglie wavelength associated with a He atom in helium gas at room temperature (27 °C) and 1 atm pressure.
Answer:

Here, T = 27°C = 300 K,

P = 1 atm = 1.01 × 105 N . m-2

Mass of He atom,

mHe = \(\frac{4}{\text { Avogadro’s number }}=\frac{4}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}\)

= 6.64 × 105  N.m-2

∴ Typical de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{3 m_{\mathrm{He}} k T}}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\left(3 \times 6.64 \times 10^{-27} \times 1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 300\right)^{1 / 2}} \mathrm{~m}\)

= 0.73A°

Question 28. Einstein’s photoelectric equation shows how the cut-off voltage and threshold frequency for a given photosensitive material can be determined with the help of a suitable photograph.
Answer:

Einstein’s equation: eV0 = h(f-f0)

Where, V0 = cut-off voltage due to frequency/ of incident light,

f0 = threshold frequency

Now, V0=  \(\frac{h f}{e}-\frac{h f_0}{e}\)

This is of the form y = mx + c. So the graph of V0 vs f will be a straight line AB of slope – v0,

The point of intersection of AB with the x-axis gives the value of f. For any incident frequency, corresponding to any point C on AB, the ordinate OD gives the value of the cut-off voltage V0.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Straight Line AB Of Slope

Question 29. An electron microscope uses electrons, accelerated by a voltage of 50 kV. Determine the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electrons. Taking other factors, such as numerical aperture, etc. to be the same, how does the resolving power of an electron microscope compare with that of an optical microscope that uses yellow light? C Kinetic energy of the electron

E = 50 keV = 50 × 1.6  ×10-16 J

∴ de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{\sqrt{2 \times\left(9.1 \times 10^{-31}\right) \times\left(50 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-16}\right)}} \times 10^{10} \mathrm{~A}\)

= 0.055 A°

λ<< λ’

The wavelength of yellow light,

λ’≈ 5900 A°

λ<<λ’

So, λ<<λ’

The least distance (d) between two points that a microscope can observe separately is proportional to the wavelength of light used, i.e, d ∝ λ

As λ<<λ’ we have d<<d’. So an electron microscope can resolve two points very much closer. Then its resolving power is much higher than that of an optical microscope

Question 30. The graph shows the variation of stopping potential with the frequency of incident radiation for two photosensitive metals A and B. Which one ofthe two has a higher value of work function? Justify your answer.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Stopping Potential With Frequency

Answer:

For metal A, W’0 = hf’0; For metal B , W0 = hf0

As f’ >f0

∴ W’0 >W0

So, the function of metal A is greater than that of metal B

Question 31. Determine the value of the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron orbiting in the ground state of the hydrogen atom (given E0 = -(13.6/n²) eV and Bohr radius r0 = 0.53 A ). How will the de Broglie wavelength change when it is in the first excited state?
Answer:

We know, the de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}=\frac{h r}{m v r}\)

= \(\frac{h r}{\frac{n h}{2 \pi}}=\frac{2 \pi r}{n}\)

For ground State, n= 1

∴  \(\lambda_1=\frac{2 \pi r_0}{1}\)

For ground state, n = 1.

∴ λ1 = 2π × 0.53 ×  10-10

= 3.3 m ×  10-10= 3.3 Å

Again , λn=  \(\frac{2 \pi r_n}{n}=\frac{2 \pi n^2 r_0}{n}\)

= n2πr0

= n λ1

When n = 2 (for first excited state) = λ1 = 2λ1

Hence, de Broglie wavelength doubles in the first excited state

Physics Q&A on Dual Nature of Matter and Radiation

Question 32. Define the term ‘intensity of radiation’ in a photon picture of light Ultraviolet light of wavelength 2270 A° from 100 W mercury source irradiates a photocell made of a given metal. If the stopping potential is -1.3 V, estimate the work function of the metal. How would the photocell respond to a high intensity ( ~ 105 W. m-2 J red light of wavelength 6300 A° produced by a laser?
Answer:

The intensity of radiation can be defined as the amount of light energy incident per square meter per second.

V0 = 1.3 V; λ = 2270 × 10-10 m

We know that hf= hf0 + ±½ mv²max

Also, hf = W0+eV0

W0 = hf- ev0

W0 = hc/λ – eV0

W0 = \(\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{2270 \times 10^{-10}}-1.3 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}\)

= \(6.669 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}=\frac{6.669 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}\)

= 4.168 eV

Again W0 = \(h f_0=\frac{h c}{\lambda_0}\)

Or, λ0 = \(\frac{h c}{W_0}=\frac{6.62 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{6.669 \times 10^{-19}}\) m

= 2.98 m = 2980 Å

The photocell would not respond to a high intensity ( ~ 105 W. m-2 ) red light of wavelength 6300 A° produced by a laser because this wavelength is greater than 2980 A°

Question 33. A proton and a particle are accelerated through the same potential difference. Which one of the two has (a) greater de Broglie wavelength, and (b) less kinetic energy? Justify your answer
Answer:

The de Broglie wavelength is related to the accelerating potential as

λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m e V}}\)

λp = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_p e_p V}} \text { and, } \lambda_\alpha=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_\alpha e_\alpha V}}\)

λα =  And \(\)

∴ \(\frac{\lambda_p}{\lambda_\alpha}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m_p e_p V}} \times \frac{\sqrt{2 m_\alpha e_\alpha V}}{h}=\frac{\sqrt{m_\alpha e_\alpha}}{\sqrt{m_p e_p}}\)

Now, the mass and charge of a -particle is greater than that of a proton

λp > λα for the same potential difference.

The kinetic energy is related to accelerating potential as

K = eV

∴ Kp = epV and  Kα = eα V

∴ \(\frac{K_p}{K_\alpha}=\frac{e_p}{e_\alpha}\)

Since the charge on the proton is less than that on the alpha particle, Kp < Ka for the same potential difference

Question 34. In the study of a photoelectric effect the graph between the. stopping potential V and frequency u of the incident radiation on two different metals P and Q is shown in:

  1. Which one of the two metals has a higher threshold frequency?
  2. Determine the work function of the metal which has greater value.
  3. Find the maximum kinetic energy of electron emitted by light of frequency 8 × 10-33 Hz Hz for this metal.

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Stopping Potential V And Frequency

Answer:

1. Threshold frequency of P, νp = 3 × 1014 Hz

The threshold frequency of Q, νQ = 6  × 1014 Hz

So, metal Q has a higher threshold frequency.

2. Workfunction of metal Q,

W = hν0 .= 6.6  × 10-34  × 6 × 1014

= 39.6 × 10-20 J

= 2.47 eV

3. The maximum kinetic energy of electron emitted from metal Q by light of frequency 8 × 10-14  Hz is,

= 6.6 × 10-34  ×  (8 × 1014– 6 ×1014 )

=13.2 × 10-20 J

= 0.825 eV

Question 35. The following graph shows the variation of photocurrent for a photosensitive metal:

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Photocurrent For A Photosensitive Metal

  1. Identify the variable X on the horizontal axis.
  2. What does point A on the horizontal axis represent?
  3. Draw this graph for three different values of frequencies of incident radiation, ν1, ν2, and ν3( ν123 )same intensity.
  4. Draw this graph for three different values of intensities of incident radiation I1 , I2 and I3(I1> I2> I3) having

Answer:

1. The variable X on the horizontal axis is the potential difference between the anode and the cathode.

2. The point A on the horizontal axis represents stopping potential

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation Different Values Of Frequencies And Intensities Of Incident Radiation

Question 36. The work functions of the following metals are given; Na = 2.75 eV, K = 2.3 eV, Mo = 4.17 eV, and Ni = 5.15 eV. Which of these metals will not cause photoelectric emission for radiation of wavelength 3300 A from a laser source placed 1 m away from these metals? What happens if the laser source is brought nearer and placed 50 cm away?
Answer:

Condition for photoelectric emission, hf> W0

Or, \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}>W_0\)

For λ = 3300 Å

⇒ \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}=\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^8}{3000 \times 10^{-10}} \mathrm{~J}\)

= \(\frac{6.03 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}\)

Mo and Ni will not cause photoelectric emission. If the laser source is brought nearer placed 50 cm away, then also there will be no photoelectric emission from Mo and Ni, since it depends upon the frequency of the source

Question 37. Radiation of frequency 1015 Hz Is Incident on two photosensitive surfaces P and Q. There is no photoemission from surface PhotoemUslon occurs from surface Q but photoelectrons have zero kinetic energy. Explain these observations and find the value of work function for surface
Answer:

There is no photoemission from surface I* because the frequency of incident radiation is less than its threshold frequency. Since photoemission occurs from surface Q and the photoelectrons have , zero kinetic energy, then the frequency of incident radiation is equal to the threshold frequency for surface Q .

Work function for surface Q, WQ = hf

= 6.6 × 10-34 × 1015

= 6.6 × 10-195

= 4.125 eV

Question 38. Find the energy required by an electron to have its de Broglie wavelength reduced from 10-10 m to 0.5 × 10-10 m.
Answer:

de Broglie wavelength

λ = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{2 m E}}\)

Or,  \(2 m E=\frac{h^2}{\lambda^2} \quad \text { or, } E=\frac{h^2}{2 m} \cdot \frac{1}{\lambda^2}\)

∴ The energy required by the electron

E1 – E2 = \(\frac{h^2}{2 m}\left(\frac{1}{\lambda_2^2}-\frac{1}{\lambda_1^2}\right)\)

= \(\frac{\left(6.62 \times 10^{-34}\right)^2}{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31}} \cdot\left[\frac{1}{\left(0.5 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2}-\frac{1}{\left(10^{-10}\right)^2}\right]\)

= 7.2 × 10-17J

E1 – E2 = \(\frac{7.2 \times 10^{-17}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}} \mathrm{eV}\)

= 450 eV

Question 39.

  1. Draw the curve showing the variation of de Broglie wavelength of a particle with its momentum. Find the momentum of a photon of wavelength 0.01A.
  2. Mention the inference of Davisson Garmer’s experiment.

Answer:

1. If momentum =p, then the de Broglie wavelength of a particle

λ = h/p

Or, λp = h = Planck’s constant Hence the λ-p graph will be a rectangular hyperbola,

Given, λ = 0.01 A° = 10-12 m

Dual Nature Of Matter And Radiation de Broglie Wavelength Of A Particle

Momentum ofthe photon

p = \(\frac{E}{c}=\frac{h f}{c}=\frac{h}{\lambda}=\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34}}{10^{-12}}\)

= 6.63 ×10-22  kg.m.s-1

2. The inference of this experiment is that an electron beam behaves as a matter wave. Hence the experiment proves de Broglie’s hypothesis.

Question 40. When light of wavelengths A and 2\ are incident on a metal surface, the stopping potentials are V0 and VQ/4 respectively. If c be the velocity of light in air, find the threshold frequency of photoelectric emission
Answer:

From Einstein’s photoelectric equation

eV0 =  hf-W0 or , W0 = hf – eV0 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) – eV0

In first case W0= \(\frac{h c}{\lambda}-e V_0\) …………………….(1)

In the Second case

W0 = \(\frac{h c}{2 \lambda}-\frac{e V_0}{4}\)

Or, W0 = \(\frac{2 h c}{\lambda}-e V_0\) …………………………(2)

From equations (1) and (2) we get,

4 W0 – W0 = 3W0 = \(\frac{h c}{\lambda} \text { or, } w_0=\frac{h c}{3 \lambda}\)

Threshold frequency \(\frac{W_0}{h}=\frac{c}{3 \lambda}\) =

∴ Threshold wavelength = 3λ

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Light Interference

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Interference Notes

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Introduction

Light propagates through the vacuum or any medium in the form of waves l light wave is a transverse electromagnetic wave. Optical phenomena observed in daily life, as produced by slits or orifices, obstacles, reflecting planes, and refracting planes, have sizes many times more than the wavelength of light.

For example, the wavelength of visible light ranges from 4 × 10-5 cm but even a very small slit in the path of light generally lias a diameter not less than I mm ie, 0.1 hence, the diameter of the orifice (slit) Is 1000 times more than the wavelength of visible light. The wavelength of light is taken as zero. with respect to large orifices, slits, obstacles, reflecting surfaces or refracting surfaces, i.e., light is not considered as waves

However In cases, when the size of an orifice or obstacle, in the path of light is too small and is comparable to the wavelength of light, the wavelength of visible light can no more be taken as zero, light has to be considered waves

Read and Learn More Class 12 Physics Notes

Optics: This branch of physics deals with the properties of light

Optics is divided into two parts

  1. Geometrical optics and
  2. Physical optics.

Geometrical optics: In this branch of optics, it is assumed that the wavelength of light is negligible in comparison with the sizes of instruments used in experiments (like an orifice ot an obstacle).

Physical optics:  it is assumed that the sizes of Instruments used In the experiment (litre size of an orifice ot an obstacle) are i comparable with the wavelength of light

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Interference

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Wavefront

Concept of wavefront

When a Stone is chopped in a reservoir, waves are set up on its still-wet surface. I tear the centre of disturbance, i.e., where the stone is dropped, waves spread out in all directions at constant velocity. Water particles ‘ however, do not spread out horizontally with the wave.

Instead, they vibrate vertically let us that at .in instant of time the displacement of a water p.irtirle. at some distance from the centre of the disturbance. Is m.minimum At the it moment, displacements of all water particles situated on the circumference of the circle of radius same as the distance of the point in reference, are maximum.

This implies that water particles on the circumference of all circles- concentric with the circle described above, should all circle- concentric with the circle described above, should be medium in the form of circles Hence. where spreading of a wave in a dimensional medium.

If a sphere is imagined with the outer of disturb nice a; its centre, all points lying on the surface of this inference sphere, ate In the same phase. In this case spherical wavefront is obtained. If the radius of the spherical spherical wavefront is obtained. If the radius of the spherical wavefront is large enough, a small part of the wavefront can be taken as a plane wavefront

Definition: As a wave generated from a source spreads in all diet nuns through the vacuum or a medium, the locus (line or surface) points it the path of the wave which is in equal phase at any moment Is called a wavefront

WBCHSE class 12 physics interference notes Different types of wavefronts

1. Spherical wavefront:

The waveforms formed during the propagation of light coming hum a point source are considered spherical in shape the locus of the points in the same phase is spherical I In, which is known as a spherical wavefront

2. Cylindrical wavefront:

The wavefront produced during the propagation of light coming from a line source (for example, a single slit) is considered cylindrical in shape

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Cylindrical Wavefront

3. Plane wavefront: The rays coming from infinity are parallel and the wavefront thus associated can be considered a plane wavefront

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Plane Wavefront

WBBSE Class 12 Light Interference Notes

Properties of wavefronts

  1. A perpendicular drawn at any point on a wavefront shows the direction of velocity of the wave at that point
  2. The velocity of a wave actually denotes the velocity of the wavefront. If v is the wave velocity, the velocity of each wavefront the perpendicular distance between two consecutive wavefronts in the same phase is called the wavelength of that wave.
  3. The phase difference between any two points located on the 1 same wavefront is zero

Ray: Perpendicular drawn to the wavefront is called Energy of a wave is transmitted from one part to another in a vacuum or in a medium along these rays. Direction of rays by yellow arrowhead.

Light-Wave And Interference Of Light Huygens’ Principle Of Wave Propagation

Dutch scientist Christian Huygens introduced a geometrical method suggesting the propagation of wavefront which is very useful in interpreting reflection, refraction, interference, diffraction etc,, of waves.From the position and shape at any subsequent time Huygens principle.

Huygens’ principle

Each point on a wavefront acts as a new source called a secondary source. From these secondary sources, secondary waves or wavelets generate and propagate in all directions at the same speed of the wave. The new wavefront at a later stage is simply the common envelope or tangential plane to these wavelets

Let S be a point source of light from which waves spread in all directions. At some instant of time, AB is a spherical wavefront

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Huygens Principle

According to Huygens’ principle, points P1,  P2, and P3 wavefront AB act as new sources, and wavelets from these sources spread out at the same speed. Small spheres each of radius ct (c = velocity of light) with centres P1,  P2, P3 respectively are imagined.

Clearly, wavelets produced by the secondary sources reach P1,  P2, P3 surfaces of these imaginary spheres after a time interval. Following Huygens’ Principle, the common tangential plane AJBJ, to the front surface of small spheres should be the new wavefront In the forward direction, after a time t. In this context, it is pointed out that A1B1 is also a spherical surface with a centre at S.

Wavefronts, close to a source of light are spherical. But when a wavefront is far enough from the source of light, the Wavefront is taken to be a plane wavefront

From Huygens’ method of tracing wavefronts, like wavefront, A1B1 another wavefront A2B2 is also obtained behind AB, which can be called back wavefront. But in Huygens’ opinion, there is no existence of such a back wavefront. Later this opinion was supported theoretically and also experimentally.

Verification of the Laws of Reflection

Using Huygens’ principle, laws of reflection of light can be proved. Reflection of a plane wavefront from a plane reflecting surface

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Laws Of Reflection

WBCHSE class 12 physics interference notes Short Notes on Young’s Double Slit Experiment

Let AC, part of a plane wavefront, perpendicular to the plane of paper, be incident on the surface of a plane reflector XY. Note that the plane wavefront and the plane of paper intersect each other along line AC. The plane of the paper and the plane of the reflector are also perpendicular to each other. According to Huygens! each point on wavefront AC acts as a source of secondary wavelet.

Let at time t = 0, one end of the wavefront touches the reflecting surface at A. At the same moment, wavelets form from each point on the wavefront AC. These wavelets gradually reach the reflector. After a time t say, wavelet from C reaches point F of the reflector. In accordance with Huygens’ principle, all points from A to F on the reflecting plane in turn generate wavelets. Hence by the time.

The wavelet from C reaches F, wavelet generated at A reaches D in the same medium. Centring point A, an arc of radius CF is drawn. Assuming c to be the speed of light in the medium under consideration, we have CF = ct. Tangent FD is drawn on the arc. FD is the reflected wavefront after time t.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Reflected Wavefront On The Arc

The perpendiculars M1A and M2F drawn on the incident wavefront AC are the incident rays and the perpendiculars AM’1[ and FM’2 drawn on the reflected wavefront DF are the corresponding reflected rays. NA and N’F are the normals drawn at the points of incidence on the reflector.

.-. ∠M1AN = Angle of incidence

And ∠M’2FN’ = Angle of reflection (r)

According to

∠CAF = 90°- ∠NAC= ∠M1AC-∠NAC

= ∠M1AN =i

And ∠AFD = 90°-∠N’FD= ∠M2FD-∠N’FD

= ∠M’2FN’ = r

Now from ΔACF and ΔAFD, ∠AGF = ∠ADF = 90°,

CF = AD = ct and AF is the common side.

Hence the triangles are congruent.

∠CAF = ∠AFD

∴  Angle of incidence (i) = Angle of reflection (r)

Thus one of the laws of reflection is proved.

AC, FD and AF are the lines of intersection of the incident wavefront, reflected wavefront and plane of the reflector with the plane of paper respectively, which means AC, FD and AF lie on the plane of paper. Hence the perpendiculars to these lines, that is, incident ray (M1A or M2F), reflected ray (AM1′or FM’2) and the perpendicular to the reflector (AN or FN’) at the point of incidence lie on the same plane. Thus, the other law of reflection is also proved.

∴ sini = sin r -∠CAF = \(\frac{C F}{A F}\)

And in r = sin ∠AFD = \(\frac{A D}{A F}\)

Verification of the Laws of Refraction

Laws of refraction can also be proved using Huygens’ theory of wave propagation. Refraction of a plane wavefront in a plane refracting surface is shown in

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Laws Of Refraction

Let XY be a plane refracting surface which is the surface of separation of medium 1 and medium 2 . The speed of light in medium 1 is cx and in medium 2 is c2. Refractive indices of media 1 and 2 are μ1 and μ2  respectively.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Refractive Indices Of Media

There fore μ1 = \(\frac{c}{c_1}\) and μ2 = \(=\frac{c}{c_2}\) where c is speed of light in vacuum

The refractive index of the medium 2 with respect to that of medium

μ2 = \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{c / c_2}{c / c_1}=\frac{c_1}{c_2}\) ………………. (1)

Assume that, part of a plane wavefront normal to the plane of paper is incident on the surface of separation of two refractive media. The wavefront and the plane of paper intersect each other along the line AC. The plane of refraction XY is also at right angles to the plane of the paper.

According to Huygens’ principle, all the points on the wavefront AC act as sources of secondary wavelets. Suppose, at t = 0, one end of the wavefront touches the plane of the refracting medium at A.

At the same moment, wavelets form from each point on the die wavefront AC. These wavelets gradually reach the plane of the refracting surface. After a time t, say, the other end C of the wavefront touches F on the surface of separation.

Following Huygens’ principle, all points from A to F on the plane of separation will in turn generate wavelets. Hence, by the time the wavelet from C reaches F, wavelets are generated at A toward medium 2.

Centring point A, nt FD is drawn to the arc from point A to F on the time the wavelet from C reaches F, wavelets generated at A advance toward medium 2. Centring point A, an are of radius C2 t is drawn. Tangent FD is drawn to the arc from point F. FD is the refracted wavefront after time t.

Naturally , CF = c1t …………. (2)

And = AD = c2 t …………. (3)

The perpendiculars M1A and M2F wavefront AC are the incident rays and the perpendiculars AM1 and FM2 drawn on the refracted wavefront DF are the corresponding refracted rays. NA and NfF are the normals drawn at the points of evidence on the surface of separation

∠M1AN = angle of incidence (i)

and ∠M2FN’ = angle of refraction (r)

According to

∠CAF = 90°- ∠NAC= ∠M1AC-∠NAC

= ∠M1AN = i And ∠AFD = 90°-∠N’FD= ∠M’2FD- ∠N’FD

= ∠M2‘FN’ = r

∴ sini = sin ∠CAF = \(\frac{A D}{A F}\)

∴ \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\frac{C F}{A F}}{\frac{A D}{A F}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{C F}{A D}=\frac{c_1 t}{c_2 t}=\frac{c_1}{c_2}\)

Or, \(1 \mu_2=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Hence Snell’s law of refraction is proved.

Practice Problems on Constructive and Destructive Interference

AC, FD and AF are the lines of intersection of the incident. wavefront, refracted wavefront, and the plane of refraction with ” the plane of paper respectively which means AC, FD, and AF lie on the plane of the paper.

Hence the perpendiculars on them, that is, incident ray (M1A or M2F), refracted ray (AM1‘ or FM1′) and perpendicular to the refracting surface (AN or FN’) I lie on the same plane. Thus the other law of refraction is also proved.

Relating to the above discussion live has been drawn for the refraction from a rarer to a denser medium. The entire proof can be done for the refraction from a denser to a rarer medium as well in the same manner.

The velocity of light changes while passing from one medium to another keeping its frequency unchanged.

From equation (1) we get

⇒ \(_1 \mu_2=\frac{c_1}{c_2}=\frac{n \lambda_1}{n \lambda_2}=\frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}\) …………………….. (4)

∴ c = nλ; n – frequency of light

λ1 and λ2 are the wavelengths of light in media (1) and (2) respectively. It means, the wavelength of light changes due to refraction.

Light interference class 12 notes 

LightWave And Interference Of Light Huygens’ Principle Of Wave Propagation Numerical Examples

Example 1. A plane wavefront, after being Incident on a plane reflector at an angle of Incidence, reflects from It. Show that the Incident wavefront and the reflected wavefront are Inclined at an angle (180° -2i) with each other.
Solution:

AB and CD are the incident and reflected wavefronts respectively. On extending the wavefronts, they meet at E and the angle between them is 0. From ∠BAC =l and ∠DCA = r.

From ΔACE, 6 + 1+r = 180°

Or,  θ = 180- (i+r) Or, θ= 180 – 2i

∴ i = r

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Plane Wave Front Incident On A Plane Reflector

Example 2. The wavelength of a light ray in vacuum is 5896A What will be Its velocity and wavelength when It passes through glass? Given, the refractive index of glass = 1.5 and the velocity of light In vacuum = 3 × 108 m. s-1
Solution:

Here, X = 5896A°, c = 3 × 108 m .s-1 μg = 1.5

We know , \(\mu_g=\frac{c}{c_g}\)

Or, \(c_g=\frac{c}{\mu_g}\)

⇒ \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1.5}\)

= 2 × 108 m. s-1

Again, nλ =c (in vacuum) nλg = cg (in glass)

⇒ \(\frac{n \lambda_g}{n \lambda}=\frac{c_g}{c}\)

= \(\lambda^c \frac{c_g}{c}=\frac{\lambda}{\mu_g}\)

= \(\frac{5896}{1.5}\)

= 3931 A°

Conceptual Questions on Wave Optics and Interference

Example 3. Refractive indices of glass with respect to water and air were 1.13 and 1.51 respectively. If the velocity of light In air is 3 × 108 m. s-1 what will be The velocity in water
Solution:

We know, \({ }_a \mu_g=\frac{c_a}{c_g}\)

∴ \(1.51=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{c_g}\)

cg = Velocity of light in the glass

Or, \(c_g=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1.51}\)

= 2 × 108 m. s-1

Again , \({ }_{w^{\prime}}{ }_g=\frac{c_w}{c_g}\) = velocity of light in water

Or, 1.13 = \(\frac{c_w}{2 \times 10^8}\)

Or, cw = 2.26 × 108 m. s-1

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Light interference class 12 notes 

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Principle Of Superposition Of Waves

Simultaneous propagation of a number of waves through the same space In a medium is called superposition During superposition, while one wave superposes on another, individual properties remain unaltered

Let us consider the situation where at any point in a medium a number of waves are incident at the same time. The displacement of the point would have been different if the waves passed through it individually. But as all the waves are incident at the same time, the point undergoes a resultant displacement (since displacement is a vector quantity). Clearly, resultant displacement is the vector sum of the displacements produced by each wave. This is the principle of superposition of waves. The principle can be expressed as follows

At any instant, the resultant displacement of appointing a medium due to the influence of a number of waves is equal to the vector sum of displacements produced by each individual wave at that point at that instant.

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Interference Of Light

Interference Of Light Definition :

When two light waves of the same frequency and amplitude (or nearly equal amplitude) superpose in a certain region of a medium, the intensity of the resultant light wave increases at certain points and decreases at some other points in that region.

This phenomenon is known as interference of light An increase in intensity of light is due to constructive interference and a decrease in intensity is due to destructive interference. The increase or decrease of intensity in the resultant light wave depends on the phase difference of the superposing light waves at that point.

The principle of superposition of waves is applicable to all types of | waves, that is for sound waves, light waves, and other electromagnetic waves, as well. An example of the superposition of waves is interference which was first demonstrated experimentally by Youngin in 1801.

Young’s Double Slit experiment

Young’s experimental arrangement is as follows. Two narrow slits A and B are made in close proximity to each other on an obstacle 0 placed in front of a source of a monochromatic light M. Being placed symmetrically about source M, slits A and B act as a pair of coherent sources when illuminated by the source If the laboratory is sufficiently dark,

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Youngs Double Slit Experiment

Alternate bright and dark lines can be seen on screen S placed behind O. These alternate dark and bright lines are called interference fringes

Constructive and destructive interferences

Assume that the amplitude of each of the two light waves of the same frequency is A. While propagating in the same direction through a medium they superpose at a point in the medium. The resultant amplitude at the point is equal to the vector sum of the amplitude of the original waves (by the principle of superposition of waves). If superposition takes place in the same phase, then the resultant amplitude = A + A = 2A.

As intensity is directly proportional to the square of amplitude, the resultant light will be four times as intense as the individual wave. This is called constructive interference. On the other hand, if superposition takes place in opposite phases, the resultant amplitude = A-A = 0 and the intensity of light is also zero. This is called destructive interference

If the phase difference or phase relation between two waves remains the same then the interference pattern at every point of the medium remains the same.

It may be noted that destructive interference does not imply the destruction of energy. No loss of energy takes place, only the energy of the dark points is transferred to that of the bright points so that the total energy of the incident waves remains constant. In other words, there is only redistribution of light energy over the region of superposition.

Light interference class 12 notes Analytical treatment of interference:

Let c and D be two sources of monochromatic light. The amplitude of each wave = A, wavelength = λ and speed = c.

Two light waves A moving in the same direction superpose at the point E. The A resultant displacement of point E due to superposition is the 1 algebraic sum of two individual displacements produced by the J two waves.

Distances of the point E from the two sources are x and (x+ δ), respectively. So the path difference of the waves at that point is δ . If y1 and y2 are the displacements of point E due to the waves produced from sources C and D In time t

⇒ \(y_1=A \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}(c t-x)\)

⇒  \(y_2=A \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}[c t-(x+\delta)]\)

The resultant displacement of point E

y = y1+ y2

⇒ \(A\left[\sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}(c t-x)+\frac{\sin 2 \pi}{\lambda}\{c t-(x+\delta)\}\right]\)

⇒ \(2 A \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\left\{c t-\left(x+\frac{\delta}{2}\right)\right\} \cdot \cos \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\)

⇒  \(\sin C+\sin D=2 \sin \frac{C+D}{2} \cdot \cos \frac{C-D}{2}\)

Or, \(y=A^{\prime} \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\left\{c t-\left(x+\frac{\delta}{2}\right)\right\}\) …………………. (2)

Where A’ = 2A \(\cos \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\) …………………. (3)

The sine function in equation (1) suggests that the resultant wave is also a wave of velocity c and wavelength A.

Again equation (2) shows, that the amplitude A’ of the resultant wave is not equal to the amplitude of the two superposing waves but modified by their path difference δ.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Analytical Treatment Of Interference

1. Condition for destructive interference:

If \(\delta=\frac{\lambda}{2}, \frac{3 \lambda}{2}\), \(\frac{5 \lambda}{2}\) ….. = \((2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\) (where n = 0 or any integer), \(\cos \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\) = 0 and hence A’ = 0 and hence A’ = 0. Amplitude being zero

Intensity is also zero. Thus at points where the path difference between the waves are odd multiples of, the intensity of light is zero. These points are dark points. The two waves produce destructive interference at such points. This phase difference between the two waves at points where destructive interference takes place is

⇒ \(\Delta \phi=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}=(2 n+1) \pi\)

∴ [since phase difference, path difference ]

2. Condition for constructive interference:

If = 0 , \(\frac{2 \lambda}{2}\), \(\frac{4 \lambda}{2}, \ldots=2 n \frac{\lambda}{2}\)(where n = 0 or any integer) that is A’ = 2A . Amplitude is the highest, and intensity is also the maximum.

Thus at points where the path difference between the waves is an even multiple of y the intensity of light is maximum. These points are bright points. Two waves produce constructive interference at these points

Thus the difference between the two waves at points where conNtrnctlvc Interference takes place Is

⇒ \(\Delta \phi=\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \frac{2 n \lambda}{2}\) = 2n

It Is to be noted that, point E is not a single point that satisfies equation (1). That Is, either of the conditions of destructive and constructive interference is obeyed not only at a single point In space but for a set of points.

The locus of the point E is, In general, hyperbolic. But when E is at a large distance from the sources C and D, compared to their mutual distance CD, the locus of E is effectively a straight line.

As a result, dark and bright straight lines are obtained instead of dark and bright points, due to destruc¬ tive and constructive interference, respectively. These are called dark and bright interference fringes

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Interferences

Interference of light physics class 12 Important Definitions in Light Interference

Intensity:

Clearly, interference of two waves results in a variation of intensity of light at different points. The amplitude of the resultant wave, A’ = 2A cos \(\cos \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\) and therefore A’ can vary from 0 to ±2A.

As intensity is directly proportional to the square of amplitude, the value of intensity increases from 0 to 4A². That is maximum intensity can be four times the intensity of a single wave. IfI is the intensity at a point on the screen then,

I∝ A’²

⇒ \(4 A^2 \cos ^2 \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\)

Or, I = \(k 4 A^2 \cos ^2 \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\)

Or, \(I_0 \cos ^2 \phi\)

Io= 4A²k, (is the maximum intensity) and \(\frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\)

Hence the intensity in the region of superposition follows the cosine-squared rule. Variation of intensity with phase difference is shown below

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Variation Of Intensity

1. Let waves coming from two coherent sources of equal frequency be of amplitudes A1 and A2, intensities I1 and 12 with phase difference Φ.

1. On the superposition of two coherent waves, the expression for resultant amplitude is

⇒ \(A^{\prime 2}=A_1^2+A_2^2+2 A_1 A_2 \cos \phi\)

2. As intensity is directly proportional to the square of amplitude, the resultant intensity is

I = \(I_1+I_2+2 \sqrt{I_1 I_2} \cos \phi\)

⇒  \(I_{\max }=I_1+I_2+2 \sqrt{I_1 I_2}=\left(\sqrt{I_1}+\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2\)

And \(I_{\min }=\dot{I}_1+I_2-2 \sqrt{I_1 I_2}=\left(\sqrt{I_1}-\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2\)

3. Moreover, as the amplitude of bright fringe = A1+ A2 and amplitude of dark fringe =|A1A2|

⇒  \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{\left(A_1+A_2\right)^2}{\left(A_1-A_2\right)^2}\)

2. If the sources are not coherent, the resultant intensity at any point will just be the sum of the intensities of the individual waves

Conditions of sustained interference:

  • Two light sources must be monochromatic and should emit waves of the same wavelength.
  • The amplitude of the waves should be equal or nearly equal.
  • There must always be a constant phase difference between the two waves. With the change in phase of any wave there: should be a simultaneous change in the other to the same extent.
  • Such pair of sources are called coherent sources

Formation of Coherent Sources

It has already been stated that for sustained interference, a pair of coherent sources is necessary. When sources are not coherent, the intensity at any point changes so rapidly that no interference fringe is observed in practice, and all points appear equally bright

Two similar but separate sources do not form coherent sources. Even two very close points on the same source are not coherent.

Hence there are special methods of creating coherent sources. Some are described below: 

  • In Young’s double slit experiment, two slits S1 and S2, kept at a fixed distance from light source S, act as coherent sources
  • In Lloyd’s single mirror experiment, a thin illuminated slit S and its virtual image, S’, formed due to reflection from a plane mirror, serve as a pair of coherent sources
  • In the experiment with Fresnel’s biprism, two virtual images and S2 of a source S, produced by refraction through the biprism 1, act as coherent sources

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Coherent Sources

Explanation of Formation of Interference Fringes

The formation of interference fringes can be explained by the principle of superposition of waves. In Young’s experiment, slits A and B are equidistant from source M. In that case, the secondary sources will also be coherent and hence in phase. Wavefronts from these two sources, propagate one after another

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Formation Of Interference Fringes

Through the space between the obstacle and the screen. Hence they superpose in solid line arcs to show wavefronts in the same phase. Broken line arcs, in between represent wavefronts in the opposite phase.

Clearly, waves coming from two sources proceeding towards the points a, c and e, superpose in the same phase. Thus amplitude of the resultant wave becomes maximum and constructive interference takes place along the lines leading to the points a, c and e on the screen.

On the other hand, waves are directed towards points b or d, superposing the opposite phase. Thus amplitude of the resultant wave is zero and destructive interference takes place. Therefore, interference fringes consisting of bright and dark lines are displayed on screen S.

The wavelength of monochromatic light be A, the path difference between two waves along the dark lines happens to be odd multiples \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) of and that along bright lines, even multiples of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\).

1. If white light is taken instead of monochromatic light in Young’s double slit experiment, the central bright fringe will be white and bright-coloured fringes will be observed on either side of the central fringe. This is because wavelengths of the colours, forming white are different and therefore each one produces its characteristic interference fringe pattern. Thus fringes of different colours are produced.

As the central line of the interference pattern is equidistant from each of the two coherent sources; the light of all component colours reaches phase and a bright white light is formed at that point.

2. The fringes disappear when one of the slits A or B is covered by an opaque plate and the screen gets illuminated with a uniform intensity.

3. If one of the slits is covered with translucent paper, fringes of the same width will be formed. But the bright band will look less bright and the dark band will look less dark.

Interference of light physics class 12 Width of interference fringes

In A and B are two coherent sources of monochromatic light, S is a screen, 2d = distance between A and B, O is the mid-point of AB, and D = perpendicular distance of AB from the screen. As AC = BC, waves starting from two of the sources in phase reach point C in phase. Hence, the resultant amplitude as well as intensity at C is maximum.

All points on the line perpendicular to the plane of the paper and passing through C will be equidistant from the I sources A and B. Thus a central bright fringe is formed which is a straight line.

Now a point P is taken at a distance x from C i.e., CP = x; AP and BP are joined. As the lengths of two paths are not equal there will be a phase difference between the waves reaching P from A and B. Thus whether constructive or

Destructive interference will take place at point P depending on the path difference between the two incoming waves

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Width Of Interference Fringes

From the

BP² = D² + (x+ d)² and AP² = D² + (x-d)²

BP² – AP² = (x+ d)²- (x-d)² = 4xd

Or, Bp- Ap = \(\frac{4 x d}{B P+A P}=\frac{4 x d}{2 D}=\frac{2 x d}{D}\) ……………… (1)

[Since D»d hence BP = AP ~D]

This path difference between the two waves in reaching P

Bp -Ap = \(\frac{2 x d}{D}\)

By the condition of interference, for n -th bright fringe at P, path difference

⇒ \(\delta=\frac{2 x_n d}{D}=2 n \cdot \frac{\lambda}{2}\) [n = 0, 1, 2……]

Or, \(\frac{D n \lambda}{2 d}\) ……………. (2)

xn is the distance of n -th bright fringe on either side of C] Taking n = 1, 2, 3 …, the positions of 1st, 2nd, 3rd etc. bright fringe, on either side of the central bright fringe, can be found out

For (n + 1) -th bright fringe

⇒ \(x_{n+1}=\frac{D(n+1) \lambda}{2 d}\) …………… (3)

So, the distance between two consecutive bright fringes

= \(x_{n+1}-x_n=\frac{D(n+1) \lambda}{2 d}-\frac{D n \lambda}{2 d}=\frac{D}{2 d} \cdot \lambda\)

By the condition for the formation of the n -th dark fringe at P is

⇒  \(\delta=\frac{2 x_n d}{d}=(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2} \text { or, } x_n=\frac{D}{2 d}(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Taking n = 0, 1, 2 etc, positions of 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc., dark fringes on either side of the central bright fringe can be found out

Hence for (n + 1) -th dark fringe

⇒ \(x_{n+1}=\frac{D}{2 d}\{2(n+1)+1\} \frac{\lambda}{2}\) ………………………….. (6)

Hence the distance between two consecutive dark fringes

= \(x_{n+1}-x_n=\frac{D}{2 d}\{2(n+1)+1\} \frac{\lambda}{2}-\frac{D}{2 d}(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\)

= \(\frac{D}{2 d} \cdot \lambda\) ………………………….. (7)

Thus the distance between two consecutive bright or dark fringes is the same. This distance is called fringe width. Therefore if y is the fringe width then,

= \(\)………………………….. (8)

It is clear from equation (8) that

  1. Since there is no ‘n’ in the expression of y, it can be said that fringe width does not depend on the order of the fringe. All hinges are of the same width.
  2. Fringe width is directly proportional to the wavelength of light used. For a greater wavelength, fringe width increases, i.e., fringes will be wider. Similarly, for shorter wavelengths, fringes will be thinner.
  3. If the value of D is large, the fringe width will Increase.
  4. If the value of d is small, the fringe width will Increase.

Also If the total experiment is conducted In any other medium, wavelength decreases (\(\lambda^{\prime}=\frac{\lambda}{\mu}0\)  ). Hence, fringe width decreases.

Further, in whichever position the screen is placed In front of sources A and D, the interference pattern is always observed. As interference patterns are not restricted to a fixed place, these are called non-localised fringes.

Angular fringe width

If the angular position of the n-th fringe on the screen be Qn then,

⇒ \(\theta_n=\frac{x_n}{D}=\frac{\frac{D n \lambda}{2 d}}{D}=\frac{n \lambda}{2 d}\)

For (n + 1) -th fringe , \(\theta_{n+1}=\frac{(n+1) \lambda}{2 d}\)

So, the angular separation between two successive fringes i.e., the angular width of the fringe

⇒ \(\theta=\theta_{n+1}-\theta_n=\frac{(n+1) \lambda}{2 d}-\frac{n \lambda}{2 d}=\frac{\lambda}{2 d}\) …………………………………………… (9)

The angular width of the fringe does position of the screen

Angular width decreases with the Increase of the separation between the coherent sources and vice versa. 0 = R)

If the entire experiment Is performed Inside any liquid (refractive Index for say), the angular width decreases

Optical path

The equivalent optical path of the distance covered by a certain monochromatic light through a certain medium In a certain interval of time Is the path covered by light In the same Interval of time through a vacuum.

Suppose, the refractive Index of a medium for a certain monochromatic ray Is fi. The velocity of the ray In that medium Is v.

⇒ \(\frac{c}{v}\) Or, c= v ………………………………….. (10)

Where, c – velocity of light In vacuum]

Now If the said monochromatic light takes time t to travel through the said medium then,

v = \(\frac{x}{t}\)

And If light can travel distances in the same Interval of time through a vacuum then

c = \(\frac{l}{t}\)

Hence from equation (10), we get

⇒ \(\frac{l}{t}=\mu \cdot \frac{x}{t}\)

Or, l = μ. x

Here l,  according to the definition of optical path, Is the equivalent optical path of x.

For more than one medium, we can write optical path

l = \(\Sigma \mu_i x_i\)

Displacement of fringes due to the introduction of a thin plate:

A and H are two monochromatic, coherent sources of light, S’ It the screen, the 2d distance between A and U, 0 is the midpoint of AB, and Dr I perpendicular distance of All front of the screen.

Waves coining from two coherent sources produce an Interference pattern on the screen. Generally, point C Is the position of the central bright fringe as AC = BC. A point P Is considered on the screen. Now a glass plate is introduced perpendicularly in the path AP. Let its thickness be t and the refractive index of glass he mm. it results in the shifting of the entire fringe along with its central fringe.

This is caused by the difference in the velocity of light in air and glass

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Velocity Of Light In Air Glass

While moving from A to P, light travels a path (AP-t) through air (ft = 1) and a path t through glass

Hence optical path from A to P= (AP-t). 1+μ. 1

= Ap + t (-1)

Differences in optical paths from the points A and B

δ = Bp- Ap- t(μ-1)

= (Bp- Ap)- t(μ-1)

= \(\frac{2 x d}{D}-t(\mu-1)\)

If P is at the centre of n -th bright fringe

= \(\delta=2 n \cdot \frac{\lambda}{2}=n \lambda\) , where n = 0,1,2……..

= \(\frac{2 x d}{D}-t(\mu-1)=n \lambda\)

Or, x = \(\frac{D}{2 d}\{n \lambda+t(\mu-1)\}\)

Hence, because of the presence of a glass plate, a distance of n -th bright fringe from C, x = \(\frac{D}{2 d}\{n \lambda+t(\mu-1)\}\). Putting n = 0 in this equation we get the displacement of the central bright fringe due to the insertion of the plate

Let the displacement be x0

⇒ \(x_0=\frac{D}{2 d}(\mu-1)\)t

The refractive index of glass p is greater than 1, hence xQ is positive, i.e., the central bright fringe will move further from C towards the glass plate.

Putting n = 1, displacement of the 1st bright fringe l.e., xl is obtained.

∴  \(\frac{D}{2 d}\{n \lambda+t(\mu-1)\}\)

∴ Fringe width

y = \(x_1-x_0=\frac{D}{2 d}\{\lambda+(\mu-1) t\}-\frac{D}{2 d}(\mu-1) t=\frac{D}{2 d} \cdot \lambda\)

It proves that though a displacement occurs In fringe pattern due to introduction of a glass plate, fringe width remains unaltered

⇒ \(\frac{y}{\lambda}=\frac{2 D}{d}\) …………. (12)

From equations (11) and (12),

⇒ \(x_0=\frac{y}{\lambda}(\mu-1) t\) …………. (13)

If x0,y, t and A are known, the refractive index p of the material of the plate can be found out from equation (13).

Also if p is known, t can be calculated out.

Due to the introduction of the glass plate, if the central bright fringe shifts a distance equal to the length of m bright fringes, then

⇒ \(x_0=m y \quad \text { or, } \quad \frac{y}{\lambda}(\mu-1) t=m y\)

Or, \((\mu-1) t=m \lambda\)

Or, m = \(\frac{(\mu-1) t}{\lambda}\)

This equation gives the equivalent number of fringe width by which a displacement of total fringe pattern occurs.

Interference of light physics class 12 

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Interference Of Light Numerical examples

Example 1. A screen is placed at a distance of 5 cm from a point source. A 5 mm thick piece of glass with a refractive index of 1.5 is placed between them. What is the length of the call path between the source and the screen
Solution:

Length of air path between the source and screen = 5 – 0.5 = 4.5 cm

Airpath, equivalent to path through the glass plate

= Refractive index x thickness = 1.5 × 0.5 = 0.75 cm

length of optical path = 4.5 + 0.75 = 5.25 cm

Example 2. Two straight and parallel slits, 0.4 ap-ft sraOhiminated by a source of monochromatic light. Interference pattern of fringe width 0.5 mm I* produced 40 cm away from the sUts. Find the length of the light used.
Solution:

In this case 2d = 0.4 mm = 0.04 cm , y= 0.5 mm = 0.05cm, D = 40 cm

We know, the fringe width,

y = \(\frac{\lambda D}{2 d}\)

⇒ \(\lambda=\frac{2 d \cdot y}{D}=\frac{0.04 \times 0.05}{40}\)

5 × 10-5 cm

= 5000 × 10-8cm = 5000 A°

Real-Life Scenarios in Light Interference Experiments

Example 3.  In Young’s double-slit experiment on interference, the distance between two vertical slits was 0.5 mm and the distance of the screen from the plane of slits was 100 cm. It was observed that the 4th bright band was 2.945 mm away from the second dark band. Find the wavelength of light used.
Solution:

From it is observed that the distance between the second dark band to 4th bright band = 2.5 x bandwidth. If bandwidth or fringe width is y then,

2.5 × y = 2.945

⇒ \(\frac{2.945}{2.5}\)

= 1.178 mm

As, \(=\frac{D \lambda}{2 d}\)

So, \(\lambda=\frac{2 d \cdot y}{D}=\frac{0.05 \times 0.1178}{100}\)

= 5890 × 10-8 cm = 5890 A°

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Youngs Double Slit Experiment On Interference

Example 4. Monochromatic light of wavelength 6000A° was used to set up interference fringes. On the path of one of the interfering waves, a mica sheet 12 × 10-5 cm thick was placed when the central bright fringe was found to be displaced by a distance equal to the width of a bright fringe. What is the refractive index of mica?
Solution:

On placing the mica sheet, if the central bright fringe shifts by the distance of m number of bright fringes then

(μ-1)t = mλ

Here, m = 1, λ = 6000 A° = 6000 × 10-8 cm

t = 12× 10-5 cm

((μ-1) ×12× 10-5

= 1× 6000 × 10-8

Or, (μ-1) = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Or, mm = 1.5

Example 5. A ray of light of wavelength 6 × 10-5cm, after passing through two narrow slits, 1mm apart, forms interference fringes on a screen placed lm away. Find the list between two successive bright bands Of the fringes.
Solution:

The distance between two successive bright bands is the fringe width

Width of the fringe \(, \lambda=6 \times 10^{-5}\)

D = 1m, λ = 6 × 10-5 cm

0.06cm

Example 6. In a double-slit experiment using monochromatic a screen at a light, interference fringes are formed at a particular distance from the slits. If the screen is moved towards the slits by 5 × 10-2 m, then the fringe width changes by  3 × 10-2m. If the distance between the two slit is 10-3m, then determine the wavelength of the light used
Solution:

Fringe width , y = \(\frac{\lambda D}{2 d}\)

Here, A is the wavelength of light used, D is the distance of the screen from the slits, 2d is the separation between the slits. Here screen distance changes by ΔD and fringe width changes by Δy

\(\Delta y=\frac{\lambda \Delta D}{2 d}\)

Or, \(\lambda=\frac{\Delta y 2 d}{\Delta D}\)

Now , \(\Delta y=3 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}, 2 d=10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}, \Delta D=5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\)

λ = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{-5} \times 10^{-3}}{5 \times 10^{-2}}\)

= 6 × 10-2

= 6000 A°

Class 12 Physics Light Interference Notes

Example 7. In Young’s double slit experiment, the width of the fringe is 2.0 mm. Find the distance between the 9th bright band and the 2nd dark band. 
Solution:

It is seen from the distance of the 9th bright band from the second dark band

= 7.5 × width of fringe = 7.5  ×  0.2 cm = 1.5 cm

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Youngs Double Slit Experiment On Width Of Fringe

Example 8. Using light of wavelength 600 nm in Young’s double slit experiment 12 bands are found on one part of the screen. If the wavelength of light is changed to 400 nm, then what will be the number of bands on that part of the screen?
Solution:

In wavelength, λ1 = 600 nm = 600 × 10-9 m; the number of fringes, n1 = 12, fringe width y1 In the second case, wavelength, λ2 = 400 nm = 400 × 10-9 m’ number of fringes n2 and fringe width y2 first case, sucLet the distance between the slits and the screen be D, separation between the slits be 2d and length of the entire fringe pattern be x.

Now \(\frac{\lambda_1 D}{2 d}=\frac{600 \times 10^{-9} D}{2 d}\)

And n1 = \(\frac{x}{y_1}\)

Or, = \(12=\frac{x \times 2 d}{600 \times 10^{-9} D}\)

or x = \(\frac{12 \times 600 \times 10^{-9} D}{2 d}\)

Also, y= \(\frac{400 \times 10^{-9} D}{2 d}\)

n= \(\frac{x}{y_2}=\frac{12 \times 600 \times 10^{-9} D \times 2 d}{2 D \times 400 \times 10^{-9} D}\)

= 18

Example 9.  The green light of wavelength 5100 A° from- a narrow slit is incident on a double slit. The overall separation of 10 fringes on a screen 200 cm away is 2 cm, find the separation between the slits
Solution:

Width of 10 fringes, x = \(\frac{D}{2 d} \lambda\)

= 2 cm

Here, D = distance of this screen = 200 cm, 2d = separation between the two slits,  λ= wavelength of light = 5100A°

= 5100 × 10-8cm

2d = \(10 \frac{D}{x} \lambda=\frac{10 \times 200 \times 5100 \times 10^{-8}}{2}\)

= 51 × 10-3 = 0.051 cm

Example 10. The ratio of the intensities between two coherent light sources used in youngs double slit experiment, is n. Find the ratio of the intensities of the principle maximum and minimum of the band.

Let the intensities of the sources be I1 and I2 According to question, I1 = nI2

Now, if Imax and Imin are the intensities of central maximum and minima respectively then

⇒ \(\frac{\left(\sqrt{I_1}+\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2}{\left(\sqrt{I_1}-\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2}=\frac{\left(\sqrt{n} \cdot \sqrt{I_2}+\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2}{\left(\sqrt{n} \cdot \sqrt{I_2}-\sqrt{I_2}\right)^2}\)

= \(\frac{(\sqrt{n}+1)^2}{(\sqrt{n}-1)^2}=\frac{n+1+2 \sqrt{n}}{n+1-2 \sqrt{n}}\)

Example 11. In Young’s experiment, with a monochromatic light of wavelength 5890 A°, the seats are separated by a distance of 1mm. Find the angular width between two sucessive interference fringes
Solution:

Here, ,1 = 5890 A° = 5890 × 10-8cm and 2d = 1mm

= 0.1 cm

Angular width between two successive bright or dark bands

= \(\frac{\lambda}{2 d}=\frac{5890 \times 10^{-8}}{0.1}\) radian

= \(5890 \times 10^{-7} \times \frac{180}{\pi}\)

= 0.03 degree

Example 12. In Young’s double slit experiment, the angular width of a fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1 0. The wavelength of the light used in the experiment is 6000A. What is the distance between the two slits?
Solution:

We know, the angular width of a fringe,

⇒ \(\theta=\frac{\lambda}{2 d}\)

= \(\frac{\lambda}{\theta}=\frac{6000 \times 10^{-10}}{\frac{\pi}{180} \times 0.1}=\frac{6000 \times 180 \times 10^{-10}}{\frac{22}{7} \times 0.1}\)

= 3.44 × 10-3 m

∴ Distance between the slits = 3.44 × 10-4m

Examples of Applications of Light Interference

Example 13. In the experiment, the path difference between two Interfering waves at a point on the screen is 167.5 times the wavelength of the monochromatic light used. Is the point dark or bright? If the path difference is 0.101 mm, find the wavelength of light used.
Solution: Path difference

167.5 = \(335 \times \frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Wavelength of light

As the number 335 is odd So the point in Question is darkpoint

Here, \(\frac{28}{335}=\frac{2 \times 0.101}{335}\)

⇒ \(6.03 \times 10^{-4}\)

= \(6.03 \times 10^{-4}\) x 107 A = 6030 A

Class 12 physics light interference notes

Example 14. The optical path traversed by a monochromatic ray of light are same while the ray either passes through a distance of 4 cm in glass or a distance of 4.5 cm in water. What is the refractive index of water if that of glass is 1. 53?
Solution:

As the optical path is the same in both cases.

So, μgxg= μwxw

Here, xg = distance travelled through glass and xw = distance travelled through water.

Or, \(\mu_w=\mu_g \cdot \frac{x_g}{x_w}\)

= \(1.53 \times \frac{4.0}{4.5}\)

= 1.36

Refractive index of water = 1.36

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Very Short Question And Answers

Waves and Wavefronts

Question 1. At what angle does a ray of light remain inclined to the wavefront?
Answer: \(\left[\frac{\pi}{2}\right]\)

Question 2. What will be the nature of the wavefront of light emitted from a line source?
Answer: Cylindrical

Question 3. Can two wavefronts of same wave cut each other?
Answer: No

Question 4. A plane wavefront is incident on a prism. What will be the nature of emergent wavefront?
Answer: Plane

Question 5. What is the relationship between the intensity and amplitude of a wave
Answer: Intensity is the square of amplitude

Question 6. If the path difference is A, what will be the phase difference?
Answer: 2 π

Question 7. Do the two electric bulbs connected to the same electric supply line behave as coherent sources?
Answer: No

Question 8. What is the path difference between two waves for constructive interference?
Answer: 2n\(\) n = 0,1,2…..

Question 9. What is the path difference between two waves for destructive interference?
Answer: \((2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\):, n – 0,1,2…..

Question 10. What is the most important condition for interference of light
Answer: The two light sources must be coherent

Question 11. If Young’s double slit experiment is performed by using a source of white light, then only white and dark fringe patterns is seen. Is the statement true or false?
Answer: False

Question 12. What change will you observe if the whole arrangement used in youngs double slit expeiment is immersed in water
Answer: Fringe lines become narrower

Question 13. For which colour oflight, in Young’s double slit experiment, will the fringe width be minimum?
Answer: For violet light

Question 14. In Young’s double slit experiment, if the distance between the two sources is increased, how will the fringe width be changed?
Answer: The width of wringer would be reduced

Question 15. Does interference of light give any information about the nature of light waves? (whether it is longitudinal or tranverse)
Answer: No

Question 16. What is the phase difference between two points situated on a wavefront
Answer: Zero

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. The source of a spherical wavefront is____________________
Answer: A point source

Question 2. If a spherical wavefront is propagated up to infinite distance, then a part of that wavefront is called _________________  front
Answer: Plane

Question 3. Two coherent monochromatic light sources produce constructive interference when the phase difference between them is_____________
Answer: 2nπ

Question 4. In case of interference oflight, when the path difference is odd multiplies of half wavelength, then_______ interference takes place _____________
Answer: Destructive

Question 5. In case of interference of light ____________ remains conserved
Answer: Energy

Question 6. If the distance between the two slits in Young’s double slit experiment is halved and the distance between the slit and the screen is doubled then the fringe width will be_ times the previous fringe width
Answer: Four

Question 7. If the light of a smaller wavelength is used in Young’s double slit experiment, then fringe width will be
Answer: Decreased

Question 8 . In Young’s double slit experiment, if a glass plate is placed perpendicular to the direction of propagation oflight, there will be a _________________ of interference fringe, and there would be in the fringe width
Answer: Displacement, No Change

Question 9.  In Young’s double slit experiment, if a glass plate is placed perpendicular to the direction of propagation oflight, there will be a ______________________of interference fringe, and there would be in the fringe width
Answer: Number of fringes

WBCHSE physics class 12 light interference

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Assertion Reason Type

Direction: These questions have statement 1 and statement 2. of the four choices given in below, choose the one best describes the two statements

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true

Question 1. 

Statement 1: A ray of light entering from glass to air suffers from a change in frequency.

Statement 2: The velocity of light in glass is less than that in

Answer:  4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true

Question 2.

Statement 1: If the phase difference between the tight waves passing through the slits in the Young’s experiment is n -radian, the central fringe will be dark.

Statement 2: Phase difference is equal to \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) times the ath difference.

Answer:  2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 3.

Statement 1: Interference obeys the law of conservation of energy.

Statement 2: The energy is redistributed in case of interference.

Answer:  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 4.

Statement 1: When the apparatus in Young’s double slit experiment is immersed in a liquid the fringe width will increase

Statement 2: The wavelength oflight lh a liquid is a lesser titan than in air. That is \(\lambda^{\prime}=\frac{\lambda}{\mu}\)

Answer:  4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true

Question 5. 

Statement 1: Interference pattern is obtained on a screen due to two identical coherent sources of monochromatic light. The intensity at the central part of the screen becomes one-fourth if one of the sources is blocked.

Statement 2: The resultant intensity is the sum of the intensities due to two sources.

Answer: 3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.

Question 6.

Statement 1: If the two interfering waves have Intensities in the ratio 9: 4, the ratio of maximum to minimum amplitudes becomes 3:2

Statement 2: Maximum amplitude = A1+A2 amplitude = A1-A2

Also \(\frac{I_1}{I_2}=\frac{\left(A_1\right)^2}{\left(A_2\right)^2}\)

Answer:  4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Match The Column

Question 1. Match the wavefronts in column 2 with their sources in column 1

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Wavefronts

Answer:  1- C, 2-A, 3-B

Question 2.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Distance Between Slits

Answer: 1- C, 2- D, 3-B, 4-A

Question 3.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Distance Between Slits Decreased

Answer:  1- B, 2- C, 3- A,D,5-C

Question 4. In Young’s double slit experiment the path difference, Ax =(S2P~ S1P). Now a glass slab is placed in front of the slit S2.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Glass Slab

Now from the above information match the columns.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Information Match The Columns

Answer:  1-A, 2-C, 3-E, 4-C

5. Column I shows four situations of Young’s double slit experimental arrangement with the screen placed far away from the slits S1 and S2 . In each of these cases S1P0 = S2P0

S1P1 – S2P2   \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\)

S1P1 – S2P2   \(\frac{\lambda}{3}\)

Where A is the wavelength of the light used. In cases 2, 3 and 4 a transparent sheet of refractive index p and thickness t is pasted on slit S2: The thickness of the sheets are different in different cases. The phase difference between the light waves reaching a point P on the screen from the two slits is denoted by S(P) and the intensity by I(P). Match each situation given in column I with the statement(s) in column valid for that situation

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Youngs Double Slit Experiment Arrangement With Screen

Answer: 1- A,D, 2- B, 3- E, 4- C,D,E

WBCHSE physics class 12 light interference

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Conclusion

1. Light wave is a transverse electromagnetic wave, As a wave generated from a source spreads hr all directions through vacuum or any medium, the locus (line or surface) of the points in the path of the wave in the same phase at any moment constitute a wavefront.

2. According tolUrygens’ principle, each point on a Wavefront acts as a secondary source oflight. It means that from each of these secondary sources secondary wavelets are produced and they spread all around with the same speed, Tire new wavefront at a later stage is simply the common envelope or tangential plane of these wavelets.

3. The principle of superposition of waves is that at any moment the resultant displacement at any point in a medium due to the influence of a number of waves Is equal to the vector sum of the displacements of the component waves at that point.

4. If two light waves having the same amplitude and

Frequency is superposed at any region In a medium the Intensity of the resultant light wave Increases at some points In that region and decreases at some other points. This phenomenon Is known as Interference of light.

The phenomena or Increase hr light Intensity Is called constructive Interference and the decrease In light Intensity Is called destructive interference.

5. To get sustained Interference fringes two coherent sources of light are necessary, 4 Scientist Thomas Young first experimentally demonstrated the Interference of light.

6. In Young’s double-slit experiment, It Is seen that the separation of two consecutive bright or dark hands is equal. This separation Is called fringe width. Fringe width is directly proportional to the wavelength of light

7. Let the two waves

y1 = \(A \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}(c t-x)\)

y2 = \(\lambda \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\{c t-(x+\delta)\}\)

Superpose on each other to form interference. Then the resultant displacement produced at a point Is

y = \(=y_1+y_2=A^{\prime} \sin \frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\left\{c t-\left(x+\frac{\delta}{2}\right)\right\}\)

Where A’ =\(2 A \cos \frac{\pi \delta}{\lambda}\) and δ – path difference between the two waves

8. For constructive Interference, \(2 n \cdot \frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Phase difference = 2nπ

And for destructive interference, δ = (2n+1) \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Phase difference = (2n+1)π

Where n = 0 or any positive integers

In case of young double slit experiment the fringe width y = \(=\frac{D}{2 d} \cdot \lambda\)

Where D = Perpendicular distance of the screen from the

Plane of two monochromatic sources (slits), 2d = distance between two coherent sources, A = wavelength oflight used. Displacement of fringes due to the introduction of a thin plate on the path of one of the waves,

x = \(\frac{y}{\lambda}(\mu-1) t\)

Where y = fringe width, A = wavelength of light, t = thickness of the plate

Due to the inclusion of a glass plate if the central bright band is shifted through a distance of the previous m -bright bands, then (μ-1)t = mλ

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Interference Short Answer Questions

LightWave And Interference Of Light Short Question And Answers

Question 1. What change will he observe in the interference pattern produced in Young’s double silt experiment, If a blue colour of the same intensity is used Instead of a yellow colour?

Answer: We know, the fringe width wavelength of incident light. The wavelength of blue light is less than that of yellow light. Hence on using blue light, fringe width will decrease

Question 2. In a double slit experiment using white light a white fringe is noticed on the screen. What will be the change in the position of the white fringe if the screen is shifted 0.05 m from the slits?
Answer: The white fringe is the central bright fringe. Its position does not change even when shifting the screen.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Interference saqs

WBBSE Class 12 Light Interference Short Q&A

Read And Learn More WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

Question 3. Why did Huygens Introduce the concept of secondary wavelets?
Answer:

Huygens introduced the concept of secondary wavelets to define the new position of a wavefront

Question 4. What is the distance between the first bright fringe and the first dark fringe in an interference pattern? (use con vocational symbols)
Answer:

The distance between the first bright fringe and the first dark fringe is half of the fringe width. Fringe width = A, where 2d = distance between the sources, A = wavelength of inci¬ dent light and D = distance of screen from the pair of sources.

Requred distance = \(\frac{D}{2 d} \cdot \lambda \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{D}{4 d} \cdot \lambda\)

Question 5. In all interference patterns, the width of a dark fringe Is y1 and that of a bright fringe is y2. What will be the relation between y1 and y2?
Answer:

In an interference pattern, the width of a dark fringe is equal to that of a bright fringe. Hence, in this case, y1 = y2

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Interference Short Answer Questions

Common Short Questions on Interference Patterns

Question 6. Monochromatic light was used in Young’s double slit experiment, for producing Interference fringes. If a thin mica sheet Is held on the path of any of the super-posing light beams what change will be noticed in the fringe pattern? ,
Answer:

On placing a thin mica sheet the path of any of the superposing light beams’ fringe width will remain the same but the entire fringe pattern will shift.

Question 7. What is the justification for applying the principle of linear superposition of wave displacement in explaining the distributions in interference and diffraction patterns?
Answer:

The linear combination of the wave equation is also an equation. This is the very basis of the superposition of waves. a wave

Question 8. When a low-flying aircraft passes overhead, sometimes a slight shaking of the pictures on our TV screen is observed. Why?
Answer:

The metallic body of the low-flying aircraft reflects the TV signal. Interference takes place between these reflected rays and the direct rays transmitted by the TV. Hence slight shaking of the pictures is observed.

Question 9. The width of an interference fringe is 1.5mm. What would be the width of the fringe if the separation between the slits is made twice the original value?

In the first case, y = \(\frac{D}{2 d} \lambda\)

= 1.5 mm

Where 2d = distance between the slits

In the second case, the distance between the slits = 2 (2d)

∴ y’ = \(=\frac{D}{2 \times 2 d}\)λ

= \(\frac{1}{2}\left(\frac{D}{2 d} \lambda\right)\)

= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 1.5 = 0.75mm

= 0.75 mm

Question 10.

  1. State one defect of Huygens’ wave theory.
  2. Prove the laws of reflection by using Huygens’ principle

Answer:

1. According to Huygens’ principle each point on the second wavefront emanating from the source acts as a source and from this source wavelets are supposed to spread out uniformly in all directions including in the direction of the source But in reality, no such back wavefront exists and Huygens principle fails to explain the reason behind the absence of back wavefront.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 11. In a certain medium, the path difference of 5 × 10-5 cm corresponds to a phase difference n. Estimate the speed of the light waves of frequency 3 × 1014 Hz in the medium
Answer:

Wavelength (λ) of the light waves used = path difference due to a phase difference of 2π = 2x (5 × 10-5)

= 10-4cm = 10-6 m

∴ Speed of the light waves  = νλ = (3 × 1014) × 10-6

= 3 × 108 m.s-1

Short Answer Questions on Young’s Double Slit Experiment

Question 12.  In Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe width is 2.0 mm. Determine the separation between the 9th bright fringe and the 2nd dark fringe

Fringe width =2.0 mm. So the distance between the second dark fringe and the third bright fringe

⇒ \(\frac{\text { fringe width }}{2}\)

= 1.0 mm

Again, the distance between third bright fringe and 9th bright fringe =(9 – 3) × 2.0 = 12.0 mm

So the distance between the second dark fringe and 9th bright fringe

= 1.0+12.0 = 13.0 mm = 1.3 cm

Question 13. How does fringe the width, and distance in Young’s double slit experiment change the when of separation double between slit expert
Answer:

Fringe width, y = \(\frac{\lambda D}{2 d}\) where D is the distance between the slit and the screen.

So, if D is doubled then y is also doubled.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Interference Questions and Answers

Light Wave And Interference Of Light Questions and Answers

Question 1. A point object t is placed on the axis of a convex lens at a distance greater than the focal length of the lens. What is the shape of the refracted wavefront?
Answer:

The wavefront of light rays, emitted born a point source it spherical convex. After being refracted through the Iens, the wavefront becomes spherical concave. This implies that after refraction through the lens, light rays converge

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Concave And Convex Spherical Wavefront

Question 2. What will be the nature of the wavefront of the direct sunlight and why will it be so?
Answer:

Plane wavefronts. Actually, the spherical wavefronts with the sun at the centre be have effective as plane wavefronts on the earth, at a very large distance from the sun.

Question 3. Interference fringe does not contradict the law of conservation energy – justify
Answer:

In an interference pattern, there is no loss or destruction of light energy in the dark fingers area. The energy just gets shifted from the region of the dark band to the region of the bright band. Total energy remains the same.It can be shown that the average intensity of a set of simultaneous consecutive dark and bright fringes is the same as the intensity of usual illumination in the same region.

Hence, interference fringe does not contradict the law of conservation of energy

WBBSE Class 12 Light Interference Q&A

Question 4. Two media of refractive indices μ1 and μ21 and μ2 ) are separated by a plane surface. If some part of a plane wavefront is in the first medium and other port of the wavefront Is the second medium, show the shape of the wavefront In this position diagrammatically. stance colours reach here in the same phase and bri
Answer:

AB and BC are two plane wavefronts inclined to each other

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Two Plane Wavefronts

Question 5. Why don’t two light sources of the same type produce an Interference pattern?
Answer:

The primary condition for the formation of interference fringes is that the two sources must be coherent and the phase difference between the intended waves for interference pattern on superposition, must remain constant

Extended light sources are aggregations of point sources where temperature varies from point to point which affects the radiation. Due to the random vibration of particles emitting light, there is a continuous change in phase. Thus no two-point sources from extended sources, maintain a constant phase difference and, hence are not coherent. Interference can be produced by waves from coherent sources only. Therefore a general illumination is found all over the screen rather than any interference fringes

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Interference Questions and Answers

Key Concepts in Light Interference Questions

Question 6. What are non-localised fringes?
Answer:

Interference fringes can be found on a screen placed anywhere in front of the coherent sources. Thus, the interference pattern is not localised in a region and hence these are called non-localised fringes

Question 7. Explain the change that occurs In the interference pattern in Young’s double slit experiment, if white light is used instead of monochromatic light
Answer: 

If white light is used instead of monochromatic light In Youngs’ double slit experiment, there will be bright-coloured fringes on either side of the white central fringe. White light of different coloured lights has different wavelengths Each of these waves produces a different characteristic interference pattern.

So the interference pattern looks coloured. But the line at the centre of this coloured. But the line at the centre of this interference coloured pattern remains at equal disfrom each of the coherent sources; hence light of all colours is here in the same phase and bright white light is produced.

Question 8. If all experiments related to Young’s double-slit Interference are performed underwater, what changes in
Answer:

The wavelength of light is smaller in water than in air. Since fringe width is proportional to the wavelength of light, fringe width will decrease and lines of interference pattern will be thinner

Question 9. Two waves whose Intensities are in the ratio 9: 1 interfere. Find the ratio of the intensities of bright and dark fringes.
Answer:

Let A1 and A2 be the amplitudes of two waves of intensities fj and J2 respectively

Given that \(\frac{I_1}{I_2}=\frac{9}{1}\)

Again \(\frac{I_1}{I_2}=\frac{A_1^2}{A_2^2}=\frac{9}{1}\)

Or, \(\frac{A_1}{A_2}=\frac{3}{1}\)

If Amax  and Amin are the amplitudes of bright and dark bands, then

⇒ \(\frac{A_{\max }}{A_{\min }}=\frac{A_1+A_2}{A_1-A_2} \text { or, } \frac{A_{\max }}{A_{\min }}=\frac{3+1}{3-1}\)

= \(\frac{4}{2}=\frac{2}{1}\)

⇒ \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{A_{\max }^2}{A_{\min }^2}=\frac{4}{1}\)

Question 10. In Young’s double-slit experiment, one of the covered

  1. With translucent e silts is paper and an opaque plate.
  2. What changes will be observed In the Interference pattern in each case

Answer: 

1. An interference pattern will be formed and the fringe width will be unchanged. the difference in intensities of dark and bright fringes trill decreases i.e., bright fringes trill become less bright and dark fringers will become less dark.

2. Interference pattern trill vanishes and a continuous illumination trill be seen on the screen

Short Answer Questions on Young’s Double Slit Experiment

Question 11. What Is the effect on the interference pattern In Young’s double silt experiment if,

  1. The screen is moved away from the silts
  2. Separation between the slits is increased

Answer:

The width of interference fringes in Young’s double slit experiment, y = \(\frac{D}{2 d} \lambda\)

Here, D = distance of the screen from the slits,

2d = separation between the two slits,

λ = wavelength of light.

If the screen is moved away, D would increase, and so this fringe width would also increase.

If the separation 2d is increased, this fringe width will decrease

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 12. In Young’s double-slit experiment, if the distance between the two slits is halved and the distance between the screen a and plane of slits is doubled, how will the interference pattern be affected?
Answer: 

Fringe width, y = \(\frac{\lambda D}{2 d}\), 2d = separation between the slits, D = distance between screen and slits, A = wavelength of incident light wave.

Now if the distance between slits is d and the distance between the screen and the slit is changed to 2D then the fringe width will become,

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda D}{2 d}\)

Hence, the fringe width will become 4 times the earlier width.

Question 13. In Young’s double slit experiment, what is the path difference between the two light waves forming the 5th bright band on the screen?
Answer:

Path difference for the n-th bright band,

δ = 2n

\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = nλ

Given n = 5

So, δ = 5

Question 14. What is the significance of the optical path?
Answer:

The optical path is the distance travelled by light rays in a vacuum in the same time that it takes to traverse a certain distance (x) in a medium of refractive index. Its value is given by x.

Further, the change in phase for two rays of the same frequency will remain the same if they cover equal optical path lengths.

Question 15. Two light beams of intensities I and 4I, respectively form interference fringes on a screen. For the two beams, the phase difference at point A is \(\) and point B is. Find the difference in result intensities as A And B
Answer:

Resultant intensity at A,

\(I_A=I+4 I+2 \sqrt{I \cdot 4 I} \cos \frac{\pi}{2}\) = 5I

Resultant intensity at B,

⇒ \(I_B=I+4 I+2 \sqrt{I \cdot 4 I} \cos \pi=I\)

Hence, difference in resultant intensity = 5I – I = 4I

Question 16. The ratio of the amplitudes of two waves emitted from a pair of coherent sources is 2: 1. If the two waves superpose, what will be the ratio of the maximum and minimum intensities? What would have been the intensity at different points on the screen if the sources were not coherent?
Answer:

Let the amplitudes of the waves be A and A2 respectively.

By hypothesis

⇒ \(\frac{A_1}{A_2}=\frac{2}{1} \quad \text { or, } \frac{A_1+A_2}{A_1-A_2}=\frac{2+1}{2-1}=\frac{3}{1}\)

Or, \(\frac{A_{\max }}{A_{\min }}=\frac{3}{1}\)

⇒ \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{A_{\max }^2}{A_{\min }^2}=\frac{9}{1}\)

Ratio of intensities =9:1.

For incoherent sources, at any point on the screen, the intensity

would be the sum of the intensities of two waves.

If amplitudes are 2A and A respectively then, intensities

7 = 4A² and 2 = A²

Resultant intensity at any point on screen = 4A²+ A² – 5

Common Questions on Interference Patterns in Light

Question 17. If the ratio of maximum to minimum intensities of the fringes, produced in Young’s double slit experiment is 4:1, what is the ratio of the amplitudes of light In a wave of coherent sources?
Answer: In this case

⇒ \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{\left(A_1+A_2\right)^2}{\left(A_1-A_2\right)^2}\)

Or, \(\frac{4}{1}=\frac{\left(A_1+A_2\right)^2}{\left(A_1-A_2\right)^2} \text { or, } \frac{A_1+A_2}{A_1-A_2}=\frac{2}{1}\)

Or, \(\frac{A_1+A_2+A_1-A_2}{A_1+A_2-A_1+A_2}=\frac{2+1}{2-1}\)

Or, \(\frac{A_1}{A_2}=\frac{3}{1}\)

Question 18. Light waves of different intensities from two coherent sources superpose to interfere. If the ratio of the maximum intensity to minimum intensity is 25, find the ratio of the intensities of the sources.
Answer:

Here

⇒ \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{\left(A_1+A_2\right)^2}{\left(A_1-A_2\right)^2}\)

Or, 25 = \(=\frac{\left(A_1+A_2\right)^2}{\left(A_1-A_2\right)^2} \quad \text { or, } \frac{A_1+A_2}{A_1-A_2}\) = 5

Or, \(\frac{A_1+A_2+A_1-A_2}{A_1+A_2-A_1+A_2}=\frac{5+1}{5-1}\)

Or, \(\frac{A_1}{A_2}=\frac{6}{4}=\frac{3}{2}\)

Or, \(\frac{I_1}{I_2}=\frac{A_1^2}{A_2^2}=\frac{9}{4}\)

I1= I2= 9:4

Question 19.  In a laboratory, interference fringes are observed In air medium. Tlie laboratory is now evacuated by removing air. If other conditions remain unaltered, what changes will be observed in the fringe pattern?
Answer:

The refractive index of air is slightly more than 1 . labora¬ tory being evacuated, the refractive index of the medium decreases. Hence wavelength increases. As fringe width is directly propor¬ tional to the wavelength of light used, fringes of marginally increased width will be observed

Question  20. In an Interference pattern by two identical slits, the intensity of the central maximum is I. What will be the intensity at the same spot if one of the slits is close

Let the amplitudes of the waves be a and a

amax = a+a = 2a

So, Imax  = a²max = 4a²

= 4I0

[I0 = Intensity due to each slit]

When one of the slits is closed, the intensity at the same spot is \(I_0=\frac{I_{\max }}{4}=\frac{I}{4}\)

Question 21. In a double-slit experiment, Instead of taking slits of equal width, one slit is made twice as wide as the other. Then how will the maximum and minimum intensities change?
Answer:

In case 0f interference of two waves with the same amplitude (a)

amax = a+a = 2a;

Amin = a-a = 0

Maximum intensity ∝ a² : minimum intensity = 0

In case of interference of two waves with amplitudes a and A (A>a)

amax = a+A: amin = A – a ≠ 0

Minimum intensity  0 and maximum intensity (a+A)> 4 about

Hence, the maximum and minimum intenpattern will increase

Question 22. Monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is incident on a water surface from air What are the wavelength, frequency and speed of

  1. Reflected and
  2. Refracted light?

1. For reflected waves, the length and speed remain the same.

∴  \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{589 \times 10^{-9}}\) and c= 3 × 108m .s-1

∴  Frequency f = \(\frac{c}{\lambda}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{589 \times 10^{-9}}\) = \(\)

= 5.09 × 1014 HZ

2. In the case of refraction only the frequency if fixed

= \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{1.33}\)

= \(=\frac{v}{f}=\frac{2.20}{5.09 \times 10^{14}}\)

= 44 nm

Practice Questions on Coherent Sources in Interference

Question 23. What is the shape of the wavefront in each of the following cases?

  1. Light diverges from a point source.
  2. Light emerges out of a convex lens when a point source is placed at its focus.
  3. The portion of the wavefront of light from a distant star intercepted by the earth. Pt

Answer:

  1. Spherical
  2. Plane
  3. Plane

Question 24. In Young’s double slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength A, the intensity of light at a point on the screen where the path difference is A is k units. What is the intensity of light at a point where the path difference is
Answer: 

Resultant intensity at a point in Youngs double slit

⇒ \(I=I_1+I_2+2 \sqrt{I_1 I_2} \cos \phi\)

When path difference = λ, phase difference

β = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \lambda=2 \pi\)

∴ I +I’+2\(\sqrt{I \cdot I}\) = 4I

∴ k = 4I

When path difference = \(\frac{\lambda}{3}\) , phase difference

Φ= \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda} \cdot \frac{\lambda}{3}=\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)

I” = I+I+2\(\sqrt{I \cdot I}\). cos \(\sqrt{I \cdot I} \cdot \cos \frac{2 \pi}{3}\) = I

I” = I = \(\frac{k}{4}\)

Question 25. In a double slit experiment, the angular width of a fringe is found to be 0.2° on a screen placed 1 m away. The wavelength of light used is 600 nm. What will be the angular width of the fringe if the entire experiment apparatus is immersed in water? hike refractive Index of water to be \(\frac{4}{3}\)

Angular width, θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{d}\) = 0.2°

When the entire experiment is done underwater,\(=\frac{\lambda}{u}\)and angular width,

= \(\frac{\lambda^{\prime}}{d}=\frac{\lambda}{\mu d}\)

= \(\frac{\theta}{\mu}=\frac{0.2}{4 / 3}\)

= 0.15

Question 26. Use Huygens’ principle to show that a point object placed in front of a plane mirror produces a virtual image at the back of the mirror whose distance is equal to the distance of the object from the mirror.
Answer:

Let A be a point source of light at a distance y from the plane mirror MM’. In the absence of the mirror let the wavefront travel A’ in time t. But due to the presence of the M mirror the reflected wavefront will reach We point A in the same time interval t.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Distance y From The Plane Mirror MM

Thus AA’ = ct (here, c= velocity of light

i.e., AO+ OA’ = ct

Again, AO+OA = ct

OA = OA’

Important Definitions in Light Interference

Question 27. Following is a list of some factors which could possibly influence the speed of wave propagation. Nature of the source, The direction of propagation, Motion of the source and or observer, Wavelength, Intensity of the wave.

On which of these factors, if any, does:

  1. The speed of light in a vacuum,
  2. The speed of light in any medium like glass or water, depends.

Answer:

  1. The speed of light in a vacuum is an absolute (universal) constant and does not depend on any factor.
  2. The speed of light in any other medium depends only on the wavelength of light that the medium

Question 28. In a double slit experiment using light of wavelength 600 nm, the angular width of a fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1 0. What is the spacing between the two slits?
Answer: 

Using, dsinθ = nλ we get

d = \(\frac{n \lambda}{\sin \theta}=\frac{1 \times 600 \times 10^{-9}}{\sin 0.1^{\circ}}\)

= \(3.43 \times 10^{-4}\)m

Question 29.

1. Using Huygens’ principle, draw the diagrams to show the nature of the wavefronts when an incident plane wavefront gets

  1. Reflected from a concave mirror,
  2. Refracted from a convex lens.

2. Draw a diagram showing the propagation of a plane wavefront from a denser to a rarer medium and verify Snell’s law of refraction
Answer:

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 6 Light Wave And Interference Of Light Incident Wavefront And Incident Wavefront

Let be the time taken by the wavefront to travel the distance BC, Thus BC = vt

Similarly AE. = v2t

For triangles ABC And AEC,

sin i = \(\frac{B C}{A C}=\frac{v_1 t}{A C}\)

And sin r \(\frac{A E}{A C}=\frac{v_2 t}{A C}\)

Where i and r are the angles of incidence and refraction respectively

\(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{v_1}{v_2}\)…………… (1)

If c is the speed of light vacuum, then

⇒ \(\mu_1=\frac{c}{v_1}\)

Or, \(v_1=\frac{c}{\mu_1}\)

And \(\mu_2=\frac{c}{v_2}\)

Or, \(v_2=\frac{c}{\mu_2}\)

Here, μ12 and μ2 are known “as the refractive indices of medium 1 and medium 2 respectively. From equation

⇒ \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{c}{\mu_1} \times \frac{\mu_2}{c}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Or, in i = sin

This is Snell’s law of refraction.

Examples of Applications of Light Interference

Question 30. A beam of light consisting of two wavelengths, 800 nm and 600 nm is used to obtain the interfer¬ ence fringes in Young’s double slit experiment on a screen placed 1.4 m away. If the two slits are sepa¬ rated by 0.28 mm, calculate the least distance from /. the central bright maximum where the bright fringes of the two wavelengths coincide
Answer:

⇒ \(\frac{n_1 \lambda_1 D}{2 d}=\frac{n_2 \lambda_2 D}{2 d}\) [2d= distance between the slits

Or, \(\frac{n_1}{n_2}=\frac{\lambda_2}{\lambda_1}\)

= \(\frac{600}{800}=\frac{3}{4}\)

∴ 3rd order of 800 nm will overlap with 4th order of 600 nm

∴  Distance of the point from central bright maximum

y = \(\frac{n_1 \lambda_1 D}{2 d}=\frac{3 \times 800 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.4}{2.8 \times 10^{-4}}\)

= 12 × 10-3 m

= 12 mm

Question 31. If one of two identical slits producing interference in Young’s experiment is covered with glass, so diet die light intensity passing through it is reduced to 50%, find the ratio ofdie maximum and minimum intensity of the fringe in the interference pattern.

What kind of fringes do you expect to observe if white light is used instead of monochromatic light?
Answer:

Let the amplitudes of the light waves passing through the slits be and a2 and the corresponding intensi¬ ties be  I and I2.

According to the die problem,

⇒ \(I_2=0.5 I_1=\frac{I_1}{2}\)

∴ \(a_2^2=\frac{a_1^2}{2}\)

Or, \(a_2=\frac{a_1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

= \(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}=\frac{\left(a_1+a_2\right)^2}{\left(a_1-a_2\right)^2}=\left(\frac{a_1+\frac{a_1}{\sqrt{2}}}{a_1-\frac{a_1}{\sqrt{2}}}\right)^2=\left(\frac{1+\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}}{1-\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}}\right)^2\)

= \(\left(\frac{\sqrt{2}+1}{\sqrt{2}-1}\right)^2 \approx 34\).

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Diffraction And Polarisation

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Diffraction Notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Definition:

Light rays, while passing around the edges of an A obstacle or aperture, instead of traveling in a straight line, bend to some extent. This phenomenon is known as the diffraction of light.

We know from our daily experience that sound wave bends while passing around the edges of an obstacle or spreads in all directions while passing through a slit or aperture. The same thing happens with light waves. A thin tin sheet placed in sunlight casts its shadow on a wall. Sunrays can be treated as parallel rays and according to geometrical optics, they travel in a straight line. So, a sharp shadow of the thin tin sheet should be observed on the wall.

But if the shadow is examined carefully, it will be seen that the edges are not very distinct. The direction of the light wave changes while passing through the edges of an obstacle or through an aperture. This is called ‘diffraction’ of light

Read and Learn More Class 12 Physics Notes

In a blade formed by a diffraction monochromatic pattern, mm formed just outside the shadow of the blade is shown in an enlarged form. The shadow of the side of the blade is not very distinct. In diffraction due to slit or aperture, the deviation of the propagation of the wave depends on its wavelength and on the size of the slit or aperture

Comparison of diffraction Of light with diffraction of sound

The wavelength of an audible sound is sufficiently long (from 1.6 cm to 16 m). Even if there is a big hole in the line of propagation of the wave, the wave deviates considerably while passing through it. On the other hand, the wavelength of visible light is very small, 4000 A° -8000 A°.

Even a very fine slit, like the eye of a needle, is large enough in comparison to the wavelength oflight For a light wave, while passing through a slit large enough in comparison to its wavelength, there is no noticeable change in the direction of light, i.e., diffraction oflight isin distinguishable

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Comparision Of Diffraction Of Light With Diffraction

Now for the same wavelength oflight, as the aperture is gradually made finer, the diffraction of light becomes more distinct. On the other hand, a distinct diffraction can also be made to occur by increasing the wavelength oflight used, so that the slit can now be comparable in size with the wavelength of light .

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Diffraction And Polarisation

WBBSE Class 12 Diffraction and Polarisation Notes

Some Special Conclusions: Observing the phenomenon of diffraction of light

The following conclusions can be drawn:

  • Like other waves, light also spreads like a wave
  • If the size of the apertures is much larger than the wavelength of light, diffraction of light is not easily detectable. In
  • In that case,  can be said that light travels in a straight line. In the case of a very fine aperture, when light hends from its straight path, we come to know of the limitations of geometrical optics. That is why, the rectilinear behavior of light according to geometrical optics is an approximate behavior.
  • When the edges of the obstacle or aperture are sharp, diffraction is more distinctly detectable.
  • Diffraction validates the wave theory of light, but it does not give any information about the nature of light waves (whether it is longitudinal or transverse).
  • As the wavelengths are long, sound waves and radio waves are diffracted more prominently than other kind of waves.

WBCHSE class 12 physics diffraction notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Comparison Between Interference And Diffraction Of Light

Similarity: Both interference and diffraction of light take place due to the superposition of waves. Diffraction fringes are formed mainly due to the interference of waves.

Dissimilarity: There are some basic differences between interference and diffraction of light. The differences are as follows

Difference Between Interference And Diffraction

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Difference Between Interference And Diffraction

Optics Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Classification Of Diffraction

The phenomena of diffraction oflight can be classified mainly into two classes

  1. Fresnel diffraction and
  2. Fraunhofer diffraction.

1. Fresnel diffraction

  • The diffraction, where both the source of light and the screen, are at finite distances from the obstacle or the aperture is called Fresnel diffraction.
  • In this diffraction, wavefronts incident on screen are either spherical or cylindrical.
  • Obstacles with sharp edges, narrow slits, thin wires, small circular obstacles or holes etc. can produce Fresnel diffraction.

2. Fraunhofer diffraction

  • The diffraction, where the source of light and the screen are virtually at an infinite distance, is called Fraunhofer diffraction.
  • In this case, the incident wavefront is a plane. Single slit, double slit, diffraction grating etc. produce Fraunhofer diffraction

WBCHSE class 12 physics diffraction notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Fraunhofer Diffraction By Single Slit

Experimental arrangement

In this experiment of light from a monochromatic light source, Is made to a convex lens L1, through a narrow silt S. The slit S is held at e focus of the lens Lx. Hence, rays retracted from lens L1 parallel.

Classification-of-Diffraction-Phenomena-Fraunhofer-Diffraction-By-Single-Slit-1

This parallel beam of monochromatic light is incident normally on the slit AB placed perpendicular to the plane of the paper. The ray is now focussed by a convex lens I1 on a screen MN, where we observe diffraction fringes.  Instead of the screen, if the diffraction pattern is observed by an objective, the tire pattern will be observed in its focal plane

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Focal Plane

Short Notes on Fraunhofer and Fresnel Diffraction

 Fraunhofer Diffraction By Single Slit Explanation

According to geometrical optics, light rays merging out from the slit AB, if focussed by the lens L2, should produce a sharp image of the slit, at point O of the screen. But actually, this does not happen.

This is because light is passing through AB, and does not propagate in straight lines. Getting diffracted by AB, the light rays spread upwards of point A id downwards of point B. So with the formation of a sharp Image of the slit O, alternate bright ml dark diffraction fringes are produced on both sides of O

Central of principle maximum

Is the midpoint of the silt AB. CO Is the principal axis, the livery point of the plane wavefront, which Is an Incident on the slit, and Is of tho name phase. All wavelets originating from those points and proceeding parallel to CO are focussed by L2 at O. Since those wavelets have no path difference, they are In the same phase. So, they make constructive Interference, and point O appears very bright. O is called principal or control maximum. Simplified form of

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Central Or Principle Maximum

Conditions for the formation of minima and secondary maxima

Suppose, some wavelets after being diffracted through an angle  are focussed at Ox by the lens L2

Now, the condition for the formation of constructive or destructive interference at the point Ox depends on the path difference of the wavelets originating from A and B. From A, a perpendicular AP is drawn on BOx.

So the path difference between the wavelets emergent from points A and B =BP. Now, BP =AB sin ∠BAP = a sin θ

[where, AB = a- width of the slit]

1. For minima:

To obtain the condition for minima being formed at O1, slit AB is notionally divided into halves, AC and CB, i.e., AC = CB = \(\frac{a}{2}\)

Let the wavelength of incident monochromatic light = λ. If the path difference between two wavelets, originating from points A and C be  \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)  they would cause destructive interference.

S°, the condition of formation of first minima on both sides of O for diffracting angle θ1 is,

⇒ \(\frac{a}{2} \sin \theta_1=\frac{\lambda}{2} \quad \text { or, } a \sin \theta_1=\lambda\)

Or, \(\sin \theta_1=\frac{\lambda}{a}\) …………………………… (1)

In general, the condition for the formation of n th minimum on both sides of O, for diffracting angle θn is, a side = nλ …………………………… (2)

Putting n = ±1, ±2, ±3,………….  in equation (2), we would get simultaneously, first, second, third etc. minima on either side of the principal maximum. Here, ± sign is used to indicate diffractions on either side of the central line.

2. For secondary maxima:

If the path difference of the wavelets emitted from A and B, BP = \(\frac{3 \lambda}{2}, \frac{5 \lambda}{2}, \cdots(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\) then at points O2, O4, etc. they would produce first, second, etc. maxima. At these points, the two waves superpose in the same phase. These are called secondary maxima. If ‘ is the corresponding angle of diffraction for the nth secondary maximum, then

⇒ \(a \sin \theta_n^{\prime}=(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\) ………………..(3)

[where, n = ±1, ±2, ±3……. etc.]

It is to be noted that the intensity of the secondary maxima gradually decreases

The linear distance of the nth minimum from the central maximum

Generally, the wavelength of visible light (for example, A = 5 × 10-7m) is much lower than the width of the slit (for example, a = 10-4m ). For such values of θ, sin θ ≈θ. With this approximation, equation (2) becomes

⇒ \(\theta_n=\frac{n \lambda}{a}\) …………………………(4)

Let the distance from principal maximum point 0 to n th minimum point On, OOn = xn and distance from screen to slit =D

As the value of θn is very small,  \(\theta_n=\frac{x_n}{D}\)

Putting the value of θn in equation (4) we get

⇒ \(a \cdot \frac{x_n}{D}=n \lambda \quad \text { or, } x_n=\frac{n \lambda D}{a}\) ………. (5)

Putting n = ±1,±2, ±3-” etc. in equation (5), linear distances of various minima from central maximum are obtained

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Width of central maximum

The angle between the first minima on either side of the central maximum is called the angular width of the central maximum.

According to equation (4), the angular spread of the central maximum on either side is

⇒ \(\theta=\frac{\lambda}{a}\)

Angular width of central maximum,

⇒ \(2 \theta=\frac{2 \lambda}{a}\) ……………………. (6)

Therefore, linear width of central maximum \(=D \cdot 2 \theta=\frac{2 D \lambda}{a}\) where D = distance of slit from the screen. If lens L2 is located very close to the slit AB, or if the screen MN is located far away from lens L2 > then D ≈the focal length of the lens (f).

In that case, linear width central maximum point In general, the condition for the formation of n th minimum on = \(\frac{2 f \lambda}{a}\)

WBCHSE class 12 physics diffraction notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Resolving Power Of Optical Instruments

Important Definitions in Diffraction and Polarisation

Two types of resolving power are relevant for different optical instruments: O Spatial resolving power and Q Spectral resolving power.

Spatial or angular resolving power

Our eye is an optical instrument. If two point objects (or their images) are very close to each other, our eyes may not see them as separate objects. They seem to be the same object or the same image. It can be verified by a simple experiment.

Let a white paper be fixed on a wall in front of us. On the paper black parallel lines are drawn at 2 mm distance apart. When we stand very close to the wall, we can see all the parallel lines. When we gradually move away from the wall, the angle formed by any two lines at our eye gets diminished and at one point it seems that die lines have merged with each other i.e., the lines can no longer be identified separately.

It can be inferred that whether two objects placed side by side can be differentiated, depends on the angle formed by the two objects at our eyes. It has been established through experiments that if the angle becomes less than 1 minute or \(\frac{1}{60}\) degree, eyes will not be able to see two objects separately.

This angle is called the angular limit of the resolution of our eyes. This means our eyes, as well as optical instrument, has their own limit of

Resolving images of two different objects located very near to each other:

  1. Limit of Resolution: The limit of Resolution is the smallest linear distance or the angular separation between two objects that can be directly seen through an optical instrument, is called the spatial limit of resolution of that instrument.
  2. Resolving power: The power or ability of an instrument to produce distinct separate images of two close objects, is called the spatial resolving power of the instrument.

Spatial resolving power is measured by the reciprocal of the limit of resolution. If Δx or is the linear or angular limit, then the resolving power would be \(\frac{1}{\Delta x} \text { or } \frac{1}{\Delta \theta}\) respectively

Spectral resolving power

Instruments like prism and diffraction grating are used to separate spectral lines of different wavelengths. For example, the D, and D2 lines of sodium spe trim have a separation of 6 A of wavelength between them. Usually, a prism cannot separate them, but a diffraction grating can. So we say that the limit of resolution of a grating is 6 A° or less, whereas that of a prism is greater than 6 A°.

If an optical instrument just resolves two spectral lines of wavelengths λ and λ + Δλ, then its limit of resolution is defined as Δλ and its spectral resolving power as \(\frac{\lambda}{\Delta \lambda}\)

Rayleigh criterion:

This defines the spectral limit of resolution of an optical instrument. Its statement is:

Two images are said to be just resolved when the central maxi¬ mum in the diffraction pattern due to one of them is situated at the first minimum in the diffraction pattern due to the other.

It is to be noted that, spatial resolving power is intimately related to spectral resolving power; because, to observe the spatial 1. on stars separation between two objects, we often have to use Instruments working on the principle of wavelength separation, phenomenon of diffraction, etc.

Resolving power of Microscope

If a microscope is able lo show the image, of two point objects, lying close lo each other, separably, then the reciprocal of the distance between these two objects is the resolving power of that microscope.

This power depends on the wavelength (λ) of light used, the refractive index (μ) of the medium between two objects and the objective of the microscope, and the cone angle (θ) formed by the radius of the objective on any one of the objects

If the internal distance between two objects is And, then the resolving power of the microscope’

R = \(\frac{1}{\Delta d}=\frac{2 \mu \sin \theta}{\lambda}\)

To increase the resolving power of a microscope, the objects and the objective of the instrument are immersed in oil. Hence, as the value of fj increases, the resolving power, R also increases.

The expression μ sinθ is called the numerical aperture of a microscope. It is a special characteristic of a microscope. It is mentioned in some microscopes

Common Questions on Polarisation of Light

Resolving power of Astronomical Telescope

When a telescope is able to analyze two separate distant objects lying closely, then the reciprocal of the angle subtended by the two objects at its objective is called the resolving power of that telescope.

If the angle subtended, by the two objects at the objective, be Δθ, then the resolving power of the telescope,

R = \(\frac{1}{\Delta \theta}=\frac{a}{1.22 \lambda}\)

[where a = diameter of the objective of the telescope]

Hence, if the diameter of the objective of the telescope is increased, its resolving power increases. Again if the wavelength of the incident light decreases, The resolving power increases.

  1. The angular spread Ad of a telescope depends solely on its objective. If the objective of a telescope is unable to analyze two stars located extremely far away, then these cannot be analyzed by the telescope even by increasing the magnification of its eye piece.
  2. To see different astronomical objects in the sky, telescopes widi an objective having a diameter 1mm or more are used

Polarisation of light class 12 notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polarisation Of Light

Polarisation of light Definition:

The phenomenon of restricting the vibrations of the electric vector of a light wave along a particular axis in a plane perpendicular to the direction of the light wave is called polarisation of light.

The phenomena of interference and diffraction demonstrate that light propagates in the form of waves. Butitis is not understandable from interference and diffraction, whether the light waves are transverseorlongitudinalinnaturebecausebothlongitudinaland transverse waves exhibit interference and diffraction.

The topic of discussion of this section is the polarisation of light. This phenomenon of light distinctly proves that light waves are transverse in nature and not longitudinal like sound waves.

Polarisation of mechanical waves

Two narrow slits A and B are cut in the middle portions of two cardboards C1 and C2. A thin long string OE, tied at one end E to a rigid support is passed through the slits A and B

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polarisation Of Mechanical Waves

Now holding the end O of the string, it is made to vibrate perpendicularly along the direction to result,is a taken transverse long wave OE, the advanced particles of the string will vibrate perpendicular to the x-axis, i.e., In the y: plane. Holding the end O, the string can be made to vibrate randomly i.e., In any direction in the yz plane. In that case, each particle of the string, in the intermediate portion of the string between O and A, will have two vertical components of transverse vibration along the y and z-axes

At first tire cardboards, C1 and C1 are so placed that both the slits A and B are parallel to y-axis. Clearly, the component of vibration will be obstructed by the slit A, but the y -component will pass through A without any obstruction and reach the section AB.

So in spite of random vibrations of the string in portion OA, the vibration of the string in section AB will be confined only along the y-axis. This phenomenon of converting the random vibrations of a transverse wave to unidirectional vibration is called polarization.

In this case, the transverse wave in section OA is unpolarised, but it turns into a polarised wave in die section AB by the slit A because the wave of this section (section AB ) vibrates only along the y-axis.

Since slit B is parallel to the y-axis, so the vibration of the wave along y-axis in the section AB, will pass through slit B also without any obstruction. Thus, the transverse wave will propagate up to point E.

Now if the slit B is rotated through 90° with respect to OE, then the slit becomes parallel to the z-axis. Clearly, the vibrations of the string of section AB along the y-axis, get completely obstructed by the slit B. So, no vibration exists in the section BE of the string i.e., the transverse wave cannot propagate along BE.

From the above discussion, it is clear that if the vibration is longitudinal, that is, parallel to the x-axis, then, they are not at all obstructed by slits A and B in any of their orientations. Thus the longitudinal wave can propagate up to point E. Hence, it can be said that polarisation is a phenomenon that is not exhibited by longitudinal waves. For example, sound wave is a longitudinal wave, hence sound wave is not polarised.

Unpolarised Light

In the usual sources of light like the sun, candle, electric lamp, etc., electrons, ions, or other charged particles vibrate randomly. Hence the transverse vibrations of the waves emitted from these sources have no definite direction.

This type of light is called ordinary light or unpolarised light.  In this case, the transverse vibration may be referred to as the sum of the two perpendicular components of equal amplitude.

Light is an electromagnetic wave. The electric field £ and the magnetic field B of this wave always vibrate perpendicular to the direction of the wave. The vibration is confined to a certain plane. The wave propagates in a direction perpendicular to the plane

The polarization of light can be easily explained by an experiment with tourmaline crystals.

Experiment with a tourmaline crystal

Tourmaline is a hexagonal crystal. The crystal cut in the form of a thin plate behaves almost like a transparent substance. The longest diagonal of the hexagonal crystal is called the crystallographic axis or optical axis C1 and C2 are two thin tourma¬ line crystal sheets and M1N1 and M2N2 are their optical axes respectively

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Experiment With A tourmaline Crystal

O is an ordinary source of light. Keeping the eye fixed at position E, one is looking towards O. Here x-axis is taken along OE. At first, the crystal C1 is placed on the way of the ray OE at location A in such a way that its optical axis M1N1 lies perpendicular to x -x-axis.

If the crystal is so placed, the intensity of light is found to be a little diminished. If the crystal is made to rotate about OE as the axis of rotation, the intensity of the transmitted light remains unchanged.

Now the crystal C2 is also placed at B on the way of the ray OE in such a way that the optic axes of both C1 and C2 are parallel to y -axis. It is found that light comes out undiminished in intensity in spite of C2 being placed.

But as the crystal C2 is rotated slowly about point B with OE as the axis of rotation, it is found that the intensity of light decreases. When the axis of C2 makes an angle 90° with the axis of C1i.e., crystallographic axis M2N2 becomes parallel to the z-axis, no light from the source reaches the eye. When C2 is rotated further, the intensity of the light gradually increases. When C2 is rotated through another 90°, i.e.,it is rotated through 180° from its initial position, light reappears with its earlier intensity

Explanation of the result of the experiment

The above experiment can be explained if we consider light waves as transverse nature and the crystallographic axes of the tourma¬ line crystals as narrow slits. The transverse vibrations of the light waves emitted from the source O are random in nature.

So, two perpendicular components of vibration along y and z-axes exist in each point of the section OA of the light ray. Since the axis M1N1 of the crystal C1 is placed parallel to y -y-axis, so the y -y-component of the transverse vibration of the light wave passes through the crystal, but the z -z-component is completely absorbed. Since one component is absorbed completely, the intensity of the transmitted light becomes half. Only y -the component of the transverse vibration of the light wave has been shown in section AB

Now if the crystallographic axis M2N2 of the crystal C2 also becomes parallel to y -the axis, the y -y-component of the transverse vibration passes through the crystal and reaches the eyes But by rotating the optical axis M2N2 through 90°, if it is placed parallel to z-axis, the crystal C2 absorbs the y component of the vibration completely.

So, no vibration exists in the section BE, lightwave is absent here. Hence no light reaches the eye  When crystal C2 is rotated through another 90° i.e., when total rotation is 180°, the optical axis M2N2 becomes parallel to the y-axis again, as a result, the y -component of the transverse vibration can pass through the crystal C2

Polarised Light Conclusion:

When an ordinary light wave passes through a tourmaline crystal or a similar medium, its random transverse vibrations are converted to a unidirectional transverse vibration.

This phenomenon is called polarisation of light and the light is called polarised light. In the, light of the section AB is called polarised light.

Any transverse wave, like a light wave can be polarised.

Polariser:

The instrument by which unpolarised light is made polarised is called a polariser. The tourmaline crystal C1 is called the polariser and the crystallographic axis M1N1 is called polarising axis.

Analyzer:

The instrument examines whether light is polarised or not and the type of polarization. Is called analyser. The tourmaline crystal C2 is called an analyzer because it examines whether the light is polarised or not and what type of polarization has been produced by the crystal C1.

When the crystallographic axes of the crystals C1, and C2 arc parallel, It is called the parallel position of polarizer and analyzer. When their crystallographic axes are perpendicular to each other, they are said to be in a crossed position.

Optics

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Plan Of Vibration And Plane Of Polarisation

Plane of vibration Definition: The plane in which the vibration of the polarised light remains confined is called the plane of vibration.

Plane of polarisation Definition: The plane containing the ray of light and perpendicular to the plane of vibration is called the plane of polarisation.

 Description:

The direction of propagation of the polarised light through the tourmaline crystal AB is shown. Light rays are advancing along x -the axis and the electric field of polarised light is vibrating along y -the y-axis, xy plane i.e., the plane ABCD is the plane of vibration of polarised light.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Plane Vibration Of Polarised Light

Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Plane Polarised Or Line arly Polarised Light

 Plane-polarised or linearly polarised light Definition: If the vibration of polarised light remains confined In a plane and takes place along a straight line, then it is called plane-polarised or linearly polarised light.

The vibration of an electric field of a light wave on a plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation of an ordinary light or unpolarised light can take place In any direction from a point. The direction of vibration In a particular plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation of a ray of light, Is shown by the arrowheads In different directions in that plane

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Directions In The Plane

Convention of representation of unpolarized and polarised light:

In the plane of the paper, unpolarUed and polarised lights are represented according to the following conventions.

Ordinary light i.e., unpolarised light has vibration In all directions In a plane, perpendicular to the direction of propagation of light  It is supposed to be made up of two mutually perpendicular vibrations. Hence ordinary unpolarized light is shown with dots and lines with arrows in opposite directions at the same time

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Representation Of Unpolarised And Polarised Light

If the polarised light has vibrations in the plane of the paper, it is shown with lines haring arrows in opposite directions perpendicular to its direction of propagation

If the vibration of polarised light in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper

They are shown by dots on the line of propagation:

  1. When unpolarised light is transmitted through an analyzer, its intensity is halved.
  2. 2. If polarised light is incident on an analyser dien die intensity of the transmitted light is given by Malus’ law.

Malus’ law:

When a beam of completely plane polarised light is incident on an analyzer, the resultant intensity of light (I) transmitted from the analyzer varies directly as the square of the cosine of the angle (θ) between the plane of transmission of the analyzer and polariser i.e

⇒ \(I \propto \cos ^2 \theta \text { or, } I=I_0 \cos ^2 \theta\)

Where I0 is the intensity of the light incident on the analyzer.

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polarisation By Reflection

In 1808 French scientist E L Malus discovered that plane polar¬ ised light can be produced by reflection. He showed that when ordinary light i.e., unpolarised light is reflected from the surface of a transparent medium such as glass or water, the reflected light becomes partially plane polarised. The degree of polarisation depends upon the angle of incidence

Angle of polarisation Definition:

For a particular angle of incidence, the degree of polarisation by reflection is maximized. This angle of incidence is called the angle of polarisation or polarising angle

The magnitude of this angle depends on the nature of the reflecting surface and the wavelength of the Incident light

For glass, the polarising angle Is an hour, and for pine water, it Is about 53°

The experiment of polarisation by reflection

Let us sup. pose, a black glass plate is placed perpendicularly a sheet of paper. MM’ is the smooth upper surface of the plate This is the reflecting surface. As the glass is black, the possibility of more than one reflection of the refracted ray is less. An ordinary’ my of light AO is incident on the reflecting surface at an angle 5(5° and is reflected along OH. The reflected ray OB will be plane-polarised.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Experiment Of Polarisation By Reflection

To examine, a tourmaline crystal ( T”) is placed OB and looked from point E located behind the crystal along BO. Now the crystal is rotated slowly about the reflected ray OB. It will be seen that at a particular position of the crystal, no light Is transmitted through the crystal. The crystal is again rotated from this position slowly and when the rotating angle becomes 90°, the Intensity of light transmitted by the crystal will be maximum. This proves that the reflected beam OB is polarised.

Polarisation by Reflection Explanation:

The transverse vibrations of ordinary incident light may be supposed to consist of two mutually perpendicular vibrations

  • One component in the plane of the paper i.e., lies in the plane of incidence and
  • The other perpendicular to the plane of paper i.e., lies parallel to the reflecting surface.

Whatever be the value of the angle of incidence on MM’s plane, the vibration of the second component will always be parallel to the reflecting surface. As a result, if the incident angle changes, the vibration of that component will be parallel with the reflecting plane MM’ but the vibrations of the first component will make varying angles with the reflecting plane. If light is incident at a polarising angle, the vibrations will be refracted from air to glass and get absorbed inside the glass i.e., these rays will not be reflected.

Only the second component will be reflected. Hence reflected ray OB is the plane polarised light. The plane perpendicular to the sheet of paper is the vibration plane of die-polarised light. So, it can be said that plane-polarised light can be produced by reflection

Polarisation Of Light Class 12 Notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Brewster S Law

When polarised light is incident at a polarising angle on the interface of two media of different refractive indices; a portion of that light is reflected and completely polarised and the other portion is refracted and partly polarised.

It has been found from the experiment that in the event of such an unreflective and refraction of an unpolarised light, incident polarising angle, the reflected ray and the refracted ray become mutually M perpendicular.It is to be mentioned here that this polarising angle is also called Brewster’s angle

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Brewsters Law

In ∠PON = angle of polarisation (polarising angle)

= ip and ∠QON’ is the corresponding angle of refraction = r.

Then , ip + r= 90°

Or, r = 90° – ip ………………………… (1)

Then, according to Snell’s law; \(\frac{\sin i_p}{\sin r}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

[where μ 1 = refractive index of the medium of incidence

μ 2= refractive index of the medium refracting of incidence

⇒ \(\frac{\sin i_p}{\cos i_p}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Or,  \(\tan i_p=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\) ………………………… (2)

If both the incident ray and the reflected then px = 1

In that case, if refractive index of the refracting medium is taken as n, the equation (2) can be written as follows

tan ip = μ

i.e., the tangent of a polarising angle is numerically equal to the refractive, the index refractive of the index refractive of the index reflecting of a medium. depends this is Brewster’son the wavelength depends of on light wavelength.It can be said that the polarising angle also

Polarisation of light class 12 notes 

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polarisation By Refraction Brewster S Law

When an ordinary (unpolarised) light is incident on the upper surface of a parallel-faced glass plate at the polarising angle, the reflected light is completely plane polarised but its intensity is very low.

A major portion (about 85%) of the incident ray is refracted and only a very small portion (15%) is reflected. The refracted ray is also partly polarised. The two planes of polarisation of completely polarised reflected ray and partly polarised refracted ray are at right angles to each other.

So it is not possible to get a strongly reflected beam of polarised light with the help of a single plate. To overcome this defect, a number of plane parallel glass plates are placed parallel to each other and an unpolarised light is allowed to fall on the first plate at the polarising angle.

Due to successive reflections, strong beams of polarised reflected light will be obtained. Ultimately two plane polarised light will be separated one reflected polarised light with vibrations perpendicular to the plane of the paper i.e., the plane of incidence, and another refracted polarised light with vibrations in the plane of the paper

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polarisation By Refraction

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Double Refraction Or Birefringence

In 1669 Ramus Bartholin discovered that when an ordinary ray of light is incident perpendicularly on the surface of a calcite crystal, it splits into two rays due to refraction
one of the refracted rays obeys the laws of refraction and is called the ordinary ray or O -ray. The other refracted ray does not obey these laws hence it is called the extraordinary ray or E- ray Both of these rays are plane polarised in mutually perpendicular planes.

The phenomenon by virtue of which an unpolarised ordinary ray, on entering a crystalline substance,

Splits up into two rays:

  1. Herapathite la an organic compound whose chemical name is iodoquine sulphate.It is a dichroic crystal used to polarise light rays.
  2. Each polaroid hasaparticularplaneofpolarisation.Apolaroid allows only those incident unpolarised light rays to refract, whose vibration plane is parallel to the polarisation plane of the polaroid. The direction of this polarisation plane of the polaroid is called the transmission axis

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Transmission Axis

  • Uses of PolaroidWith the help of polaroids, plane polarised light can be produced and analyzed very easily at a low cost
  • Polaroids are widely used as polarising sunglasses.
  • Polaroids are used to eliminate the headlight glare in motor cars.
  • Polaroids are used as glass windows in trains and airplanes to control the intensity of light coming from outside.
  • In calculators and watches, letters and numbers are formed by liquid crystal display (LCD) through the polarisation of light.
  • Polaroid films are used in making 3D cinema or picture

Class 12 Physics Diffraction Notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Numerical Examples

Example 1.  For producing a Fraunhofer diffraction fringe, a screen, Is placed 2m away from a single narrow slit. If the width of the slit is 0.2 mm, It is found that the first minimum lies 5 mm on either side of the central maximum. Find the wavelength of the incident light
Solution:

We know, if the distance between n nth minimum and the Central maximum is, the

⇒ \(x_n=\frac{n D \lambda}{a}\)

Or, 0.5 = \(\frac{1 \times 200 \times \lambda}{0.02}\)

[Here , n= 1 xn = 5mm = 0.5 cm , D = 2m = 200 cm , a= 0.2 mm = 0.02 cm ]

⇒\(\frac{0.5 \times 0.02}{1 \times 200}\)

= 5000 × 10-8  cm

= 5000 A°

Example 2. A single narrow slit of width 0.1 mm, with a parallel beam of light of wavelength 600 ×  10-9 m. An interference fringe is formed on a screen 40 cm away from the slit. At what distance, will the third minimum band be formed from the central maximum band?
Solution:

We know, if the distance of the nth minimum from the central maximum is xn, then

⇒ \(x_n=\frac{n D \lambda}{a}\)

[Here, n = 3, a = 0.1 mm = 0.01 cm D = 40 cm and A = 600 ×  10-9 m=  600 ×  10-7 cm ]

⇒ \(\frac{3 \times 40 \times 600 \times 10^{-7}}{0.01}\)

= 0.72 cm

Practice Problems on Diffraction Patterns

Example 3. A Fraunhofer diffraction pattern is formed by light, of wavelength 600 nm, through a slit of width 1.2 μm. Find the angular position of the first minimum and the angular width of the central maximum.
Solution:

If the angular position of the first minimum with respect to the central maximum be θ, then

sin θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{a}=\frac{600 \times 10^{-9}}{1.2 \times 10^{-6}}\)

= 0.5 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

= sin 30°

θ = 30° [ Here , = 600 nm = 600 ×  10-9 m

a = 1.2 μm = 1.2 ×  10-6 m

∴ Angular width of central maximum = 2θ = 2 × 30° = 60°

Example 4.  A Fraunhofer diffraction pattern is formed by a light wave of frequency 5 × 10-4 Hz through a slit of width m. Find the angular width of the central maximum [ Velocity of light in vaccum] = 5 × 10-8m.s-1

The angular width on either side of the central maximum

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda}{a}=\frac{c}{\nu a}\)

= \(\frac{c}{\nu}\)

= \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{5 \times 10^{14} \times 10^{-2}}\)

[Here, ν = 5 × 1014 Hz

a = 10-2M , C = 3 × 10-8m.s-1

= 0.6 × 10-4 rad

∴ Angular width of central maximum = 2 = 1.2 × 10-4 rad

Example – 5. A single narrow slit of width It Illuminated by a monochromatic parallel ray of light of wavelength 700 nm. Find the value of an In each cate following the given conditions

First minimum for 30 diffraction angle and

First secondary maximum for 30° diffraction angle

From the conditions of formation of n nth minimum,

a sin = n λ

a sin 30° = 1 × 700 × 10-9 m

Since θ = 30°, n= 1

And λ = 700 nm = 700 × 10-9 m]

a = \(\frac{700 \times 10^{-9}}{\frac{1}{2}}=14 \times 10^{-7}\)

From the condition of formation of n nth secondary maximum

a sin = (2n +1) \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Or, a sin = \(\frac{3}{2} \times 700 \times 10^{-9}\)

= 30° for 1st secondary maximum, n = 1 and λ = 700 nm e 700 × 10-9  m

∴ a = 21 × 10-7 m

Real-Life Scenarios in Diffraction Experiments

Example 6. A Star Is observed through a telescope. The diameter of the objective of the telescope is 203.2 cm. The wave¬ length of the light, corning from the star to the tele¬ scope U 6600A. Find the resolving power of the telescope.
Solution:

Resolving power of a telescope

R = \(\frac{a}{1.22 \lambda}=\frac{203.2}{1.22 \times 6600 \times 10^{-8}}\)

= \(2.52 \times 10^6\)

= 2.52 × 10-6

Here, the diameter of the objective of the telescope,

a =  203.2 cm

And wavelength of the Incident light, λ =  6600 A° = 6600× 10-8cm

Example 7. Find the Brewster angle for *|r to glass transmission.(R.1. of glass = 1.5)
Solution:

If the refractive index of glass relative to air is p and the polarising angle he ip, then according to Brewster’s law we have,

μ = tan ip Or, tan ip = 1.5

ip = tan-1 (1.5) = 56. 3

Class 12 Physics Diffraction Notes

Example 8. A single narrow till of width a U Illuminated by white light or whal value of a will the for minimum of rd light of wavelength 650 nm, lie al point PI For what wavelength of the Incident light will the first secondary maximum lie at point P?
Solution:

From the condition of formation of the first minimum at point P.

a sin θ = nλ

Here, n = 1 ,  θ= 30° and A 650 nm

a sin 30° = 1 × 650 or, a = 1300 nm

a sin θ = \((2 n+1) \frac{\lambda^{\prime}}{2}\)

Or, a sin θ = \(\frac{3}{2} \lambda^{\prime}\)

[Here, A’ – wavelength to be determined and n Or, \(\lambda^{\prime}=\frac{2}{3} a \sin \theta\)

= \(\frac{2}{3} \times 1300 \times \frac{1}{2}\)

= 433.33

The required wavelength a 433.33 nm

Example 9. The refractive Index of glass la 1.55. What is the polarising angle? Determine the angle of refraction for the polarising angle.
Solution:

If the refractive index of glass relative to air be μ and the polarising angle be ip, then according to Brewster’s law we have.

μ = tan ip  or, tan ip = 1.55

ip =  tan-1(1.55) = 57. 17°

Again for Incidence at the polarising angle,

ip  + r = 90° [here r =  angle of refraction]

Or, r = 90°- ip = 90°- 57.17º = 32.83

Conceptual Questions on Light Interference and Diffraction

Example 10. The critical angle of n transparent crystal is 30°, What is the polarising angle of the crystal?
Solution:

If μ is the refractive Index and θc. is the critical angle of the crystal, then

μ = \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta_c}=\frac{1}{\sin 30^{\circ}}\) = 2

From Brewster’s law, we have

tan ip

[Here ip = polarising angle]

Or, tan ip = 2 Or, ip= tan-1 (2) = 63. 43°

Example 11. Determine the polarising angle of the light ray moving from the water of a refractive index of 1.33 to a glass with a refractive index of 1.5
Solution:

From Brewster’s law, we have,

⇒ \(_w \mu_g=\tan i_p\)

[Here  ip = Polarising angle]

Or, \(\frac{a^{\mu_g}}{{ }_a \mu_w}=\tan i_p\)

Or, \(\frac{1.5}{1.33}=\tan i_p\)

Or, tan ip = 1.13

Or, ip = tan-1 (1.13) = 48. 5

Example 12. When sun rays is incident at an angle 37 on the water surface, the reflected ray gets completely plane polarised. Find the angle of refraction and refractive Index of water
Solution:

According to the question, angle of incidence

= (90° -37°) = 53°

The angle of polarization, ip = 53°

Now,  ip + r = 90°

Or, r = 90° – ip

Or, r = 90°- 53°= 37°

According to Brewster’s law, the refractive index of water

μ = tan ip = tan 53 °= 1.327

Class 12 physics diffraction notes 

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Synopsis

1. When a wave passes close to the edges of an obstacle or an aperture, the direction of motion of the wave gets changed. This is called the diffraction of the wave.

2. Light is a wave, so it has the property of diffraction. Light, while passing around the edges of an obstacle or an aperture, bends a little departing from straight-line propagation. This incident is called the diffraction of light.

3. As wavelength increases, the amount of bending i.e., dif¬ fraction also increases. Hence sound waves and radio waves are diffracted more as their wavelengths are large.

4. Fringes of diffraction are formed due to interference of the waves.

5. There are two types of diffraction phenomena. They are— O Fresnel’s diffraction and Fraunhofer’s diffraction.

6. In Fresnel’s diffraction, the source of light and the screen on which the diffraction pattern is observed are at finite distances from the obstacle or aperture.

7. On the other hand/ In Fraunhofer’s diffraction, the source of light and the screen are virtually at an Infinite distance from the obstacle or aperture. Single narrow silt produces Fraunhofer’s diffraction.

8. Single narrow slits produce diffraction fringes on the screen. On either side of the central maximum, minima and secondary maxima are formed. The intensity of the secondary maxima gradually decreases.

9. If a microscope is just able to sec two objects, lying close to each other, separately, then the reciprocal of the distance between the two objects Is the resolving power of that microscope.

10. When a telescope Is able to analyse distinctly two separate objects lying closely, then the reciprocal of the angle subtended by the two objects at the objective of the telescope, Is called its resolving power.

11. Light emitted from the usual sources like the sun, candle, electric lamp etc. are unpolarised light.

12. Hit phenomenon of restricting the vibrations of an electric vector of a light wave along a particular direction of axis, In a plane perpendicular to the direction of the light wave. Is called the polarisation of light

13. When an unpolarized light wave passes through a tourma¬ line crystal or similar medium, its random transverse vibrations are converted into a unidirectional transverse vibration.

14. Polarisation proves that a light wave is transverse Sound waves can not he polarised as is a longitudinal wave.

The plane in which the wave. vibration of the polarised light remains confined is called a plane of vibration. The plane drawn through the light rays which are perpendicular to the plane ol vibration Is called the plane of polarization

15. Plane-polarised light can be produced by reflection. For a particular angle of incidence, the degree of polarisation by the reflection is maximum. This angleofincidenceiscalledangle polarization or Brewster’s angle. The magnitude of this angle depends on the nature of the reflecting surface.

16. When a ray of light is incident at the interface of two media at a polarising angle, the reflected and the refracted rays become perpendicular to each other.

17. Brewster’s law: The tangent of the polarising angle is numerically equal to the refractive index of the refracting medium.

18. When an ordinary ray of light (unpolarised ray) is incident perpendicularly on the surface of a calcite crystal, it splits into two rays due to refraction. One of the refracted rays is called an ordinary ray or O -ray which obeys the common

19. Laws of refraction and the other is called extraordinary ray or E -ray which does not obey these laws. This Incident Is called double refraction or birefringence. The crystals In which double refraction takes place are called double-refracting crystals. Examples of such crystals are calcite, quartz, tourmaline, etc.

20. Double refracting crystals are classified Into two types

  1. Negative crystal and positive crystal.
  2. In negative crystals (tourmaline, calcite),

μo > μE ,> VE>Vo

And in positive crystals (ice, quartz),

μo > μE ,> Vo>VE

21. A polaroid is a polarising sheet or film by which polarised light can be produced.

In the single-slit experiment, the condition for the formation of the nth minimum

a sin n = n λ

Where n = ±1,±2,±3, , a = width of the slit

λ = wavelength of light used and 8n = diffraction angle]

22. Distance of nth minimum from the central maximum,

⇒ \(x_n=\frac{n \lambda D}{a}\)

Where D= distance of the screen from the slit

Condition for the formation of the nth secondary maximum

⇒ \(a \sin \theta_n^{\prime}=(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Where n = +1, ±2, etc

23. Angular width of central maximum = \(\frac{2 \lambda}{a}\)

24. Linear width of central maximum = \(\frac{2 \dot{D} \lambda}{a}\)

Malus’ law: I = Io = cos²θ

Where  Io = Intensity of the light incident on the analyzer.

25. Brewster’s law: pt = tan ip

Where n – refractive index of the refracting medium with respect to air, ip = angle of polarization.

26. ip + r = 90°; where r = angle of refraction

Examples of Applications of Diffraction and Polarisation

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Very Short Questions And Answers

Question 1. Do the sound waves have the property of diffraction?
Answer: Yes

Question 2. What idea does diffraction of light give about the nature of light waves?
Answer: Gives no idea

Question 3. Why do we feel more diffraction in sound waves than in light waves?
Answer:  As the wavelength of sound is larger than the light wave

Question 4. While passing around the comer of an obstacle, the bending with the increase of the wavelength of light
Answer: Increases

Question 5. What should be the nature of the incident wavefront ir case of Fresnel’s diffraction? Answer: Spherical or cylindrical diffraction

Question 6. A single slit produces ‘ diffraction [Fill in the blank].
Answer: Fraunhofer

Question 7. In Fresnel’s diffraction, the source of light is located at a distance from the aperture (silt)
Answer: Finite

Question 8. If the wavelength of the incident light in a single slit is increased, the Fraunhofer’s diffraction bands will be
Answer: Wider

Question 9. In a single slit diffraction, the intensity of secondary maxima gradually
Answer: Decreases

Question 10. How does the angular width of the central maximum change when the slit width is increased?
Answer: Angular width will decrease

Question 11.. Instead of violet light if red light is used in the formation of
the diffraction pattern in a single slit, the diffraction band will be wider—is the statement correct
Answer: Yes

Question 12. In single-slit diffraction, what is the condition for the formation of the first minimum point?
Answer: [a sin θ= λ, where a = width of the slit

Question 13. In a single slit diffraction, what is the expression of the linear width of the central maximum?
Answer:

a sin = \(\frac{3}{2} \lambda\) λ , where a = width of the slit

Question 14. In a single slit diffraction, what is the expression of the linear width of the central maximum?
Answer:

Linear width = 2f \(\frac{d}{a}\)

Question 15. What is called the power of an optical instrument to produce distinctly separate images of two close objects?
Answer: Resolving power

Question 16. What does the polarisation of light prove about the nature of
Answer: Lightwave is transverse

Question 17. Why do ultrasonic waves not exhibit polarisation?
Answer: Because the ultrasonic wave is a longitudinal wave

Question 18. When light is polarised, how does its intensity change?
Answer: Intensityis reduced

Question 19. What is the angle between the plane of polarisation and the direction to propagation to polarised light?
Answer: 0

Question 20. Tourmaline is a hexagonal crystal. The longest diagonal of the crystal is known as
Answer: Optic axis

Question 21. If a beam of light has its vibrations restricted to one plane instead of different planes, itis called
Answer: Polarisation

Question 22. The plane containing the direction of propagation of light and perpendicular to the plane of vibration is called
Answer: Plane of polarization

Question 23. A ray of light incident on a medium at a polarising angle. What will be the angle between the reflected and the refracted rays?
Or
An unpolarised ray of light is incident on a rectangular glass block at Brewster’s angle. What will be the angle between the reflected and the refracted rays?

Answer: 90°

Question 24. If the polarising angle for the air-glass interface is 56°, what will be the angle of refraction in glass?
Answer: 34°

Question 25. What is the relation between the polarising angle ip and refractive index μ of the medium?
Answer:  μ tan ip

Question 26. For a slab, the polarising angle is rad. What is the refractive index of the slab?
Answer: 1.732

Question 27. The angle of polarisation for glass is about
Answer: 56

Question 28. The particular angle of incidence, which is the refractive index of the slab
Answer: 1.732

Question 29. If Brewster’s angle be θ, then the magnitude of the critical angle is [Fill in the blank
Answer: sin-r5 ?(cotθ)

Question 30. Give an example of a double-refracting crystal
Answer: Tourmaline

Question 31. The ordinary ray i.e., O-ray obeys the general laws of refraction of light—is the statement correct?
Answer: Yes

WBCHSE Physics Class 12 Polarization Notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Between sound and light, _______________ bends more while passing around the comer of an obstacle
Answer: Sound

Question 2. While passing around the tall buildings, radio wave produces ____________ but ___________ does not
Answer:  Diffraction, Light waves

Question 3. Intensity of all fringes in diffraction pattern are____________
Answer: Not same

Question 4. Small spherical obstacle produces ________________ diffraction
Answer: Fresnel type

Question 5. What is the phenomenon of diffraction more pronounced in a single slit?
Answer: Fraunhofer

Question 6. Resolving power of a telescope ___________ with the increase of the diameter of its objective
Answer: Increase

Question 7. Sunray, sodium light, and light of an automobile __________________ which of these lights are polarised?
Answer: None of these is polarised.

Question 8. Quartz is a ________________crystal
Answer: Opposite

Question 9. If refractive indices of a positive crystal for O-ray and E-ray are mu and mu respectively, then mu E will be _____________ than mu o
Answer: Less

Question 10. Use of ___________ instead of glass in high-quality sunglasses is more pleasant for eyes
Answer: Polaroid

Question 11. In the case of negative crystals, the velocity of the E-ray is than that of the O-ray _______________________
Answer: Greater

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Assertion  Reason Type

Direction: These questions have statement 1 and statement 2 Of the four choices given below, choose. the one that best describes the two statements.

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is the correct explanation for statement 1
  2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1. ’
  3. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is false.
  4. Statement 1 is false, and statement 2 is true.

Question 1.

Statement 1: To observe the diffraction of light, the size of the obstacle or aperture should be of the order of 10-7 m.

Statement 2: 10-7 m is the order of Wavelength of visible light.

Answer: 1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is the correct explanation for statement 1

Question 2.

Statement 1: We cannot get a diffraction pattern from a wide slit illuminated by monochromatic light.

Statement 2:  In the diffraction pattern all the bright bands are not of the same intensity.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1. ’

Question 3.

Statement 1: The revolving power of a telescope increases on decreasing the aperture ofits objective lens.

Statement 2: Resolving power of a telescope, R =

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 4.

Statement 1: In a single slit experiment, the greater is the wavelength of the light used, the greater is the width of the central maximum.

Statement 2: The width of the central maximum is directly proportional to the wavelength of light used.

Answer: 1. These questions have statement 1 and statement 2 Of the four choices given below, choose. the one that best describes the two statements.

Question 5.

Statement 1: The value of polarising angle is independent of the color of incident light.

Statement 2: The polarising angle depends on the refractive index of the medium.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false, statement 2 is true.

Question 6.

Statement 1: The electromagnetic waves of all wavelengths can be polarised.

Statement 2: Polarisation is independent of the wavelengths of electromagnetic waves.

Answer: 1. These questions have statement 1 and statement 2 Of the four choices given below, choose. the one that best describes the two statements.

Question 7.

Statement 1: Diffraction can be seen clearly if the edge of the obstacle or slit is very sharp.

Statement 2: As the size of the slit is much larger than the wavelength, it is very difficult to capture the effect of diffraction by the naked eye.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true; statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1.

WBCHSE physics class 12 polarization notes

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Match The Columns

Question 1. In column 1, some optical incidents and in column 2 some .experiments are mentioned. The experiment which the experiment is verified is to be matched

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Some Optical Incidents

Answer: 1-C, 2-D,3- B, 4- A

Question 2. Factors on which the width of central maximum, formed due to single slit Fraunhofer diffraction, depends are to be matched.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Central Maximum Of Single Slit Fraunhofer Diffraction

Answer: 1-B, 2-D,3- A, 4- A

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Polarisation Short Answer Questions

Optics

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Short Question And Answers

Question 1. In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is made double the original width. How does this affect the size of the central diffraction band?
Answer:

The width ofthe central maxima = \(\frac{2 \lambda D}{d}\) . When d is doubled the width reduces to half.

Question 2. When a small circular obstacle is placed in front of a white wall in the path of light rays coming from a distant source, bright spots are observed at the center of the shadow. Explain.
Answer:

Diffraction of light waves takes place at the edges of the circular obstacle. Constructive interference of these diffracted rays gives rise to the bright spot at the center of the shadow on the wall.

Question 3. In a 10 m high room a partition of height 7 m separates two students on either side. Both light and sound waves can deviate from their path if they experience any obstruction. Then why is it that the two students can converse with each other even if one cannot see the other?
Answer:

For diffraction to occur, the size of the obstacle should be comparable to the wavelength. The wavelength of sound waves(≈ 0.33 m) is much larger than the wavelength of light.

Waves ((≈ 10-7 m) sound waves can be diffracted through the edges of much larger obstacles like walls or partitions. On the other hand, the wavelength of light is much smaller than the height of the partition making diffraction impossible. So the two boys can hear but cannot see each other.

Short Answer Questions on Polarisation of Light

Read And Learn More WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Short Question And Answers

Question 4. Ray optics is based on the assumption that light travels in a straight line. Diffractions observed when light propagates through small apertures/slits or around small objects disprove this assumption. Yet the ray optics assumption is so commonly used in understanding location and several other properties of images in optical instruments. What is the justification?
Answer:

The apertures of optical instruments are much larger than the wavelength of the light passing through them. So there is no possibility of any diffraction taking place and there is no anomaly in the wave optics and ray optics in all practical purposes.

Question 5. A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 1 m away.It is observed that the first minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the center of the screen. Find the width of the slit. 
Answer: 

For the first darkband, sin = \(\frac{\lambda}{d}\)

But, = \(\frac{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}{1}\)

= \(\frac{\lambda}{\sin \theta_1}=\frac{500 \times 10^{-9}}{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}\)

= 0.2 mm

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Polarisation Short Answer Questions

WBBSE Class 12 Polarisation Short Q&A

Question 6. What is understood by the diffraction of light? In the n single slit experiment, if the width of the slit increases, what will be the change of the angular width of the central maxima? State Brewster slaw. 

The angular width (2θ) offline central maximum decreases in the same ratio at which the width of the slit increases.

Question 7. The resolving power of a microscope at 6000 A° is 104. What resolving power at 4000 A°
Answer:

The resolving

⇒ \(R \propto \frac{1}{\lambda}\)

So, \(\frac{R_1}{R_2}=\frac{\lambda_2}{\lambda_1}\)

Or, \(R_2=R_1 \frac{\lambda_1}{\lambda_2}\)

⇒ \(R_2=10^4 \times \frac{6000}{4000}=1.5 \times 10^4\)

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 8. The critical angle of a transparent crystal for green light is 30°. Find the angle of polarization of that crystal.

If the angle of polarisation is ip then

tan ip = mu \(\) = 2

Or, ip= tan-1(2) = 63.435°

Conceptual Questions on Types of Polarisation

Question 9. Why are polaroids used In sunglasses?
Answer:

Unpolarised light is polarised by a polaroid. The polarising axis is kept horizontal in a sunglass so that the light is comforting for the eye

Question 10. How does the angular separation between fringes in a single slit diffraction experiment change when the distance of separation between the slit and screen is doubled?

The angular separation between fringes in a single slit diffraction pattern does not change with the distance between the slit and screen

Question 11. In a single slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is made double the original width. How does this affect the size and intensity of the central diffraction band?
Answer: 

The line width of the central diffraction fringe \(\propto \frac{1}{\text { slit width }}\)  The slit width is made double then the width of the central fringe becomes half of the initial value and intensity will increase

Question 12. In what way is diffraction from each slit related to the interference pattern in a double-slit experiment?
Answer:

The diffraction pattern of each slit modulates the intensity of interference fringes in a double-slit arrangement.

Question  13. When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a bright spot is seen at the center of the shadow of the obstacle. Explain why.
Answer:

When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, waves diffracted from the edge of the circular obstacle interfere constructively at the center of the shadow, producing a right spot.

Question 14. The light coming from a portion of the sky is sunlight that has changed its direction due to scattering by molecules hr the earth’s atmosphere. This scattered light is polarised. Therefore, It shows a variation in intensity when viewed through a polaroid on rotation
Answer: 

The light coming from a portion of the sky is sunlight that has changed its direction due to scattering by molecules hr the earth’s atmosphere. This scattered light is polarised. Therefore, It shows a variation in intensity when viewed through a polaroid on rotation.

Common Short Questions on Polarising Filters

Question 15. When are two objects just resolved? Explain. How can the resolving power of a compound microscope be increased? Use relevant formulas to support your answer.
Answer:

Two objects are just resolved by an optical system when the central maximum of the diffraction pattern due to one falls on the first minimum of the diffraction pattern of the other

Question 16. A narrow beam of unpolarised light of intensity I0 is incident on a polaroid P1. The light transmitted by it is then incident on a second polaroid P2 with its pass axis making an angle of 60° relative to the pass axis of P1. Find the intensity of the light transmitted by P2
Answer:

Intensity of light transmitted by P1= \(\frac{I_0}{2}\)

Applying Malus’ law, the intensity of light transmitted by

P2= \(\frac{I_0}{2} \cos ^2 60^{\circ}=\frac{I_0}{8}\)

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Polarisation Questions and Answers

Optics

Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Long Question And Answers

Question 1. How will the diffraction pattern in a single slit be affected if

  1. The width of the slit is increased and
  2. The wavelength of the incident light is increased?

Answer:

The angular width of a diffraction pattern is given by θ= \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\), where X = wavelength of the incident light and a of the slit

If the width of the slit a is increased, θ will decrease. So the diffraction bands will come closer to each other. On increasing the slit width, at a certain value of a, the diffraction pattern will be no more distinct to observe.

If the wavelength of the incident light A is increased, the angular width of the pattern will increase. Hence the diffraction bands will be wider

Question 2. What will be the effect on the diffraction pattern in a single slit if red light is used instead of violet light?
Answer:

We know that the angular width of diffraction in a single slit is given by θ= \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)

Now, the wavelength of red light (λr) is greater than that of violet (λν) i.e λrν

So, θrν

Therefore diffraction bands in red light will be wider

Question 3. Radio waves diffract strongly around big buildings but light waves do not. Why? 
Answer:

The wavelength range of 4 ×10-7 m to 7 ×10-7 m while that Qf radio waves is from 0.1 m to 10 4 i.e. the wavelength of radio waves is much greater than that of light waves. We know that the bending of waves increases with the increase of its wavelength. So radio waves are easily diffracted while the wavelength of light waves is too small to be diffracted around big buildings

Question 4. If a single slit is illuminated by white light, what will be the nature of color of the diffraction pattern?
Answer:

If a single slit is illuminated by white light, the central maximum of the diffraction pattern is produced due to the reinforcement of the diffracted waves having the same phase but different wavelengths. So the central maximum will be of white color. But in the case of secondary maxima on either side of the central maximum, the angle of diffraction θ ∝\(\) is taken very small.

Since λrν,   So, θrν

Hence the secondary maxima will be coloured. The inner portion of each maximum will be of violet color and the portion will be of red color

WBBSE Class 12 Polarisation Q&A

Question 5. A tourmaline crystal is placed in the path of a polarised beam of light. If it is rotated through one complete rotation, what change will be observed in the intensity of the transmitted light?
Answer:

The optic axis of the tourmaline crystal is placed along the direction of polarisation of the polarised light. The light will be transmitted through the crystal and its intensity will remain unchanged. Now taking the light ray as the axis of rotation of the crystal, it is rotated through one complete rotation.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Light Polarisation Questions and Answers

The observations are as follows:

  • The intensity will gradually diminish and become zero when the crystal is rotated through 90°
  • Next intensity begins to increase and becomes equal to its initial value when the crystal is rotated through 180°
  • Again intensity begins to decrease and becomes zero when the crystal is rotated through 270° and
  • finally, intensity begins to increase and becomes equal to its initial value when the crystal is rotated through 360°

Question 6. How will you identify experimentally whether a given beam oflight is plane polarised or unpolarised?
Answer:

A tourmaline crystal is placed in the path of. the given beam oflight and it is rotated.If the intensity of the transmitted light through the crystal remains unchanged, the beam is unpolarised. Intensity varies periodically and becomes zero twice in each rotation, then the beam is plane-polarised

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Question 7. Show that the width of the central maximum is twice that of a secondary maximum and if the width of slit is increased, the width of the diffraction fringes gets diminished.
Answer:

Distance of nth minimum from central maximum,

⇒ \(x_n=\frac{n D \lambda}{a}\)

[Where D = distance of slit from the screen, λ = wavelength of the light, a = width of the slit]

In a diffraction pattern, secondary maxima and minima alternatively and so the width of a secondary maximum

⇒ \(\beta=x_n-x_{n-1}=\frac{n D \lambda}{a}-\frac{(n-1) D \lambda}{a}=\frac{D \lambda}{a}\)

Now, the angular width of the central maximum

⇒  \(2 \theta=\frac{2 \lambda}{a}\)

Therefore, the linear width central maximum

⇒ \(\beta_0=D \cdot 2 \theta=\frac{2 D \lambda}{a}\) = 2β

i.e., the width of the central maximum is twice that of any secondary maximum

Again, both the width of the secondary maximum and central

⇒  \(\text { maximum } \propto \frac{1}{\text { width of }{slit}(a)}\)

So, if the width of slit is increased, the width of diffraction fringes gets diminished

Short Answer Questions on Polarisation of Light

Question 8. Results of two experiments on single-slit diffraction

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Result Of Two Experiments On Single Diffraction

How can the ratio of widths of two slits used in the experiments be evulated from the given results?
Answer:

Let us assume the width of the two slits, used in the experiments are d and d’

⇒ \(\theta=\frac{\lambda}{d}\)

And \(q \theta=\frac{p \lambda}{d^{\prime}}\)

⇒ \(\frac{d}{d^{\prime}}=\frac{q}{p}\)

So, the ratio of widths of two slits = d: d’ – q : P

Question 9. If the diameter of the objective of a telescope is doubled, how will its resolving power change?
Answer:

Resolving power of telescope, R = \(\frac{a}{1.22 \lambda}\)

The revolving power of a telescope changes in direct proportion to the diameter of its objective. So,if the diameter of the objective of a telescope is increased two folds, its resolving power will also be increased twofold

Question 10. If a ray of light Is incident on a reflecting medium at the polarising angle, then prove that the reflected and the refracted rays are at 90° to each other
Answer:

Let a ray of light AO be incident on XY at the polarising angle p. The reflected ray OB which is plane polarised, also makes an angle p with the normal.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Ray Of Light is Incident On reflecting Medium

Let the angle of refraction be r

According to Brewster’s law, tan p = p [where p = refractive index of the medium]

According to the law of refraction

mu = \(\frac{\sin \angle A O N}{\sin \angle N^{\prime} O C}=\frac{\sin p}{\sin r}\)

tan p = \(\frac{\sin p}{\sin r}\)

Or, \(\frac{\sin p}{\cos p}=\frac{\sin p}{\sin r}\)

or, sin r= cosp = sin (90°- p) or, r = 90°-polarising

r+p = 90°

So, the reflected ray OB and the refracted ray OC are at 90° to each other

Question 11. The critical angle between a and air is θc. A ray of light In air enters the transparent. medium at an angle of Incidence equal to the polarising angle. Deduce a relation between the angle of refraction r and critical angle θc. given transparent medium
Answer:

Let the refractive index of the transparent medium polarising angle = ip

So, \(\mu=\frac{\sin i_p}{\sin r}\)

Again, ip+ir= 90°

sin ip= sin (90°-r) = cost

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{\cos r}{\sin r}\)

According to SneU’s law, for critical angle 6

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{1}{\sin \theta_c}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\cos r}{\sin r}=\frac{1}{\sin \theta_c}\)

Or, \(\frac{\sin r}{\cos r}\)

Or, tan r = sin θc

Or, tan-1 (sin θc)

This is the required relation.

Common Questions on Polarising Filters

Question 12. Deduce a relation between the polarising angle and the critical angle.
Answer:

According to Brewster’s law

μ = tan ip = Where ip = polarising angle]

Again, according to Snell’s law

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{1}{\sin \theta_c}\)

Where = θc critical angle

⇒ \(\tan i_p=\frac{1}{\sin \theta_{\mathrm{c}}}\)

Or, tan ip  = cosec θc

or, ip = tan-1 (cosec θc )

This is the required relation.

Question 13. The optic axes of two polaroids are inclined at an angle of 45° with each other. Unpolarised light of intensity IQ being incident on the first polaroid emerges from the second polaroid. Find the intensity of the emergent light.
Answer:

In the first polaroid, the component of incident unpolarised light having polarisation parallel t6 the optic axis is transmitted through the polaroid, and the perpendicular component is absorbed. So the intensity of light incident on the second polaroid \(\frac{J_0}{2}\)

Again, the intensity of light ∝ (amplitude of light)²

If the amplitude of light incident on the second polaroid is Eo , then the amplitude of light having polarisation along its optic axis

⇒ \(E_0 \cos 45^{\circ}=\frac{E_0}{\sqrt{2}}\)

The angle between the optics axes = 45°

So the intensity of light transmitted through an incident on it

Hence the intensity of the emergent light = \(\frac{1}{2} \cdot \frac{I_0}{2}=\frac{I_0}{4}\)

Question 14. An unpolarised light is incident at the angle of polarization on a reflector. Determine the angle between the reflected and the transmitted rays

μ = tan ip [ip =a angle of polarisation]

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Angle Of Polarisation

Again  μ = \(\frac{\sin i_p}{\sin r}\)

Or, tan ip = \(\frac{\sin i_p}{\sin r}\)

Or, in r = cos ip = sin (90°- ip)

Or, r = 90° – ip

Or, ip+ r= 90°

From the figure, the angle between the reflected and the transmitted rays

= 180° – (ip + r)  100° -90° =90°

Practice Questions on Brewster’s Law

Question 15.

  1. How does the angular width of the central maxima in a single-slit Fraunhofer diffraction experiment change when the distance between the silt and screen is doubled?
  2.  In the Fraunhofer diffraction experiment, the first minima of red light = 660 ntn) is formed on the first maxima of another light of wavelength A’. Find the value of A

Answer:

The angular width of the central maxima will not change because it does not depend on the distance between the slit and the screen.

The angle of diffraction for the first minima

θ = \(=\frac{\lambda}{a}\)

The angle of diffraction for the first maxima

⇒ \(\theta^{\prime}=(2 n+1) \frac{\lambda^{\prime}}{2 a}=(2 \times 1+1) \frac{\lambda^{\prime}}{2 a}=\frac{3 \lambda^{\prime}}{2 a}\)

Given, θ  = θ ‘

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda}{a}=\frac{3 \lambda^{\prime}}{2 a} \quad \text { or, } \lambda^{\prime}=\frac{2}{3} \lambda\)

Question 16. Two polaroids A and B are kept in a crossed position. How should a third polaroid C be placed between them so that the intensity of polarised light transmitted by polaroid B reduces to 1/8 th of the intensity of unpolarised light incident on A
Answer:

Intensity of incident = IQ

Intensity of light after passing through polaroid

A = \(\frac{I_0}{2}\)

Intensity of light after passing through polaroid

C = \(\frac{I_0}{2} \cos ^2 \theta\)

Where θ is the angle between the pass axis of the A and C polaroid.

∴ Intensity of light after passing through B,

I = \(\frac{I_0}{2} \cos ^2 \theta \cos ^2\left(90^{\circ}-\theta\right)=\frac{I_0}{8} \sin ^2 2 \theta\)

If \(I=\frac{I_0}{8}\), then sin² 2θ = i Or, θ   = 45°

So thepolaroid C shouldbeplacedmaking an angle  45° with the pass axis ofpolaroid A

Question 17. A parallel beam of light of 500 nm falls on a narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 1 m away.It is observed that the first minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the center of the screen. Calculate the width of the site
Answer:

Wavelength of incident light, A = 500 nm = 500 x 10-9 m Distance between slit and screen, D = 1 m For 1st minima, angular width on either side of central maxima = \(\)

⇒ \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)

a = \(\frac{\lambda}{a} \cdot D=2.5 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}\)

a = \(\frac{\lambda \cdot D}{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}=\frac{500 \times 10^{-9} \times 1}{2.5 \times 10^{-3}}\)

= 2 × 10-4 m

= 0.2 mm

Important Definitions in Light Polarisation

Question 18. Two wavelengths of sodium light of 590 nm and 596 nm are used in turn to study the diffraction taking place at a single slit of aperture 2  × 10-6 m. The distance between the slit and the screen is 1.5 m. Calculate the separation between the positions of the first maxima of the diffraction pattern obtained in the two cases
Answer:

Angular position of first maxima, x = \(\frac{\lambda D}{a}\)

Where, D = 1.5 m, a = 2 × 10-6 m

For λ = 590 nm,

x1 = \(\frac{596 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.5}{2 \times 10^{-6}}\)

= 0.4425m

= 44.25cm

For λ = 596 nm

x2 =\(\frac{596 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.5}{2 \times 10^{-6}}\)

= 0.447m

= 44.7 cm

∴ Separation = x2 -x1 = 0.45 cm

Question 19.

1. Why does unpolarized light from a source show a variation in intensity when viewed through a period that is rotated? Show with the help of a diagram, how unpolarised light from the sun gets linearly polarised by scattering.

2. Three identical polaroid sheets P1, P2, and P3 are oriented so that the pass axis of P2 and P3 are inclined at § angles of 60° and respectively with the pass axis of O 90° P1. A monochromatic source S of unpolarized light of intensity IQ is kept in front of the polaroid sheet P2. Determine the intensities of light as observed by the observer at O. When polaroid P3 is rotated with respect to P2 at angles θ = 30° and 60°

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light three Identical Polariod Sheets
Answer:

1. Polaroid films are produced by spreading ultramicroscopic crystals of her pathic on a thin sheet of nitrocellulose. The crystals are placed on the film by a special device in such a way that the optic axes of all the crystals are parallel. These crystals are

Highly dichroic and absorbs one of the doubt-refracted beams completely. The other refracted beam is transmitted from the crystals.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polaroid Films Are Produced By Spreading Ultramicroscopic Crystals

2. The ray of light passing through polaroid Px will have intensity reduced by half

⇒ \(I_1=\frac{I_0}{2}\)

Now, the polaroid P2 is oriented at an angle 60° respect to with

⇒ \(I_2=I_1 \cos ^2 60=\frac{I_0}{2} \times \frac{1}{4}=\frac{I_0}{8}\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Polaroids

Now, the polaroid P3 is originally oriented at an angle

90° – 60°  = 30°.

Hence, when P3 is rotated by 30°, the angle between

P2 and P3 is 60°.

Therefore, the intensity

⇒ \(I_3=I_2 \cos ^2 60\)

⇒ \(\frac{I_0}{8} \cos ^2 60\)

⇒ \(\frac{I_0}{8} \times \frac{1}{4}=\frac{I_0}{32}\)

Similarly, when P3 is rotated by 60°, the angle between

P2 and P3 is 90°.

Therefore, the intensity is

⇒ \(I_3^{\prime}=I_2 \cos ^2 90\)

⇒ \(\frac{I_0}{8} \times 0\)

= 0

Examples of Applications of Light Polarisation

Question 20. A monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm is incident normally on a single slit of width 0.2 mm to produce a diffraction pattern. Find the angular width of the central maximum obtained on the screen. Estimate the number of fringes obtained in Young’s double slit experiment with fringe width 0.5 mm .which can be accommodated within the region of total angular spread of the central maximum due to single slit
Answer: 

λ = 500 nm = 5 ×10-7 m,

a = 0.2 mm = 2 ×10-4 m

Angular width of central maxima

⇒ \(\frac{2 \lambda}{a}=\frac{2 \times 5 \times 10^{-7}}{2 \times 10^{-4}}\)

⇒ \(5 \times 10^{-3}\)

The fringe width in Young’s double slit experiment,

β = 0.5 mm = 5 ×10-4  m

The number of fringes obtained

N = \(\frac{\theta_0 D}{\beta}=\frac{5 \times 10^{-3} \times 1}{5 \times 10^{-4}}\)

= 10 Assuming D = 1m

Question 21. Unpolarised light is passed through a polaroid P1. When this polarised beam passes through another polaroid P2 and if the pass axis of P2 makes an angle θ with the pass axis of P1, then write the expression for the polarised beam passing through P2. Draw a plot showing the variation of intensity when θ varies from 0 to 2π.

Let the intensity unpolarised light incident on Py be IQ.

Then the intensity of the light

In transmitted by P1 = \(\frac{I_0}{2}\)

Applying Malus’ law, the intensity of light transmitted

By P2 = \(\frac{I_0}{2} \cos ^2 \theta\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Malus Law

Real-Life Scenarios in Polarisation Experiments

Question 22. How is linearly polarised light obtained by the process of scattering of light? Find the Brewster angle for the air-glass interface, when the refractive index of glass = 1.5.
Answer:

Sunlight scattered by the sky is polarised. This is because the molecules of the Earth’s atmosphere acquire motion in two mutually perpendicular directions when sunlight falls on them, but an observer on Earth receives light only from those molecules that move in the transverse direction

The Brewster angle for the air-glass interface

= tan-1μ= tan-1 1.5 = 56.30°

Question 23.

1. In a single-slit diffraction experiment, the width of the slit is made double the original width. How does this affect the size and intensity of the central diffraction band? Explain
Answer: 

2. When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from a distant source, a bright spot Is seen at the center of the obstacle. Explain why

Answer: 

The width of the central diffraction band = \(\frac{2 D \lambda}{a}\)

1. When the width of the slit is doubled, the size of the central diffraction band is halved, and its intensity increases.

2. Waves diffracted from the edge of the circular obstacle produce constructive interference at the tire center and form a bright spot

Question 24. How does the resolving power of a microscope depend on

  1. The wavelength of the light used and
  2. The medium used between the object and the objective lens?

Resolving power, R = \(\frac{2 \mu \sin \theta}{\lambda}\)

The resolving power of a microscope varies inversely with the wavelength of the light used.

The resolving power of a microscope is directly proportional to the refractive index of the medium used between the object and the objective lens.

Conceptual Questions on Types of Polarisation

Question 25. Unpolarised light incident from air on a plane surface of a material of refractive index μ. At a particular angle of incidence i, it is found that the reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other. Which of the following options is correct for this situation?

i = \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

Reflected light is polarised with its electric vector perpendicular to the plane of incidence

i = \(\tan ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

The reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other when light incident at at Brewster’s angle

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 7 Diffraction And Polarisation Of Light Brewsters Angle

Hence the reflected light is polarised with its electric vector perpendicular to the plane of incidence.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Refraction Of Light

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes

Refraction Of Light

Refraction Of Light Definition:

When a ray of light travelling in one medium enters another medium obliquely, the ray changes its direction at the interface. This phenomenon is known as the refraction of light. CD be the plane of separation of the media—air and glass

It is called a refracting surface. The ray AO incident obliquely at 0, changes direction after refraction and goes along the line OB. NON’ is drawn perpendicular to the surface of separation. The perpendicular to CD, NON’ is called normal. AO is the incident ray and OB is the refracted ray. The angle between the incident ray and the normal to the surface of separation at the point of incidence is called the angle of incidence

The angle between the refracted ray and the normal to the surface of separation is called the angle of refraction (r).

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Deviation Of Ray

Refraction from rarer to denser medium:

If the ray travels from an optically rarer medium to a denser medium, say from air to glass, the refracted ray bends towards the normal. Here i>r.

Refraction from denser to the rarer medium:

If the ray travels from denser to rarer medium, say from glass to air, the refracted ray bends away from the normal Here r>i.

Read and Learn More Class 12 Physics Notes

Refraction Of Light Laws Of Refraction

Refraction of light is governed by the following two laws, called
laws of refraction.

  1. The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal at the point of incidence lie on the same plane.
  2. The ratio of the sine of the angle of Incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is constant.
  3. This constant depends on the nature of the two concerned media and the colour of the ray used.

This second law of refraction is known as Snell’s law, named after Willebrord Snellius (1580-1626)

Refractive Index

If i is the die angle of incidence and r is the angle of refraction, then according to the second law,

⇒ \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\mu\) (pronounced as ‘mu’) = constant.

This constant is called the refractive index of the second medium concerning the first medium.

The value of the refractive index depends on:

  1. Nature of the two concerned media and
  2. Colour of the Incident light.

Whatever may be the value of the angle of incidence, the value of the refractive index will remain constant if the colour of the incident light (i.e., frequency) and the two media remain unchanged

Μ has no unit

Short Notes on Snell’s Law

Normal Incidence:

If a ray of light is incident perpendicularly on a refracting surface, then / = 0. According to Snell’s law

π sinr = sin 0 = 0 or, r = 0

So, the ray suffers no deviation

Relative refractive index:

When light passes from medium a into another medium b, the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is called the refractive index of medium b concerning medium a. It is denoted by and i.e.,

aμb=  \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)

[i = angle of incidence, r = angle of refraction]

This refractive index is called the relative refractive index. According to the principle of reversibility of light—a ray of light will follow the same path if its direction of travel is reversed.

Following this principle, we can say that the ray BO in medium b when incidents at an angle r on the interface of the second medium a, refracts at an angle i along the path OA. Comparing this figure with it is the opposite phenomenon.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Relative Refraction Index

Thus, \(b^{\mu_a}=\frac{\sin r}{\sin i}\)

Here bμa is the refractive index of medium a concerning medium b.

So, \(a_a \mu_b \times{ }_b \mu_a=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r} \times \frac{\sin r}{\sin i}\)

= 1

Or, aμb = \(\frac{1}{b^\mu}\)

For example, if the refractive index of water concerning air is \(\frac{4}{3}\), then the refractive index of air concerning water is\(\frac{3}{4}\)

WBCHSE class 12 physics notes Absolute refractive index:

When light is refracted from a vacuum to another medium, the ratio of, the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is called the absolute refractive index of the medium

If the angle of incidence is i and the angle of refraction is r, then the absolute refractive index of the medium,

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)

Therefore, the relative refractive index of a medium concerning a vacuum is the absolute refractive index of that medium. The refractive index of a vacuum is 1.

In general, the refractive index of a medium relative to an air medium is considered as the refractive index of that medium. But it is not absolute, 1 refractive index of the medium

It is an experimental fact that the difference in the values of the refractive index of a medium concerning air and its absolute refractive index is very small. For example, at STP, the absolute refractive index of air is 1.0002918. So the refractive index of any medium concerning air may be considered as its absolute refractive index

For example, the refractive index of glass is 1.5 which means that the refractive index of glass concerning air is 1.5. At STP, the absolute refractive index of air is 1.0002918 and the refractive index of glass concerning air is 1.5. Thus, the absolute refractive index of glass = \(\frac{1.5}{1.0002918}\) = 49956 ≈1.5 The Absolute refractive index of a medium is denoted by μ. If there is more than one medium μ1, μ2, μ3 then is used.

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Refraction Of Lights

WBBSE Class 12 Refraction of Light Notes

Optical Density of a Medium

If the absolute refractive index (μ1) of any medium is greater than that of another medium (μ2), then the first medium is called optically denser and the second medium is called optically rarer. So, μ12 if then medium 1 is optically denser concerning medium 2 i.e., medium 2, is optically rarer concerning medium 1.

The optical density of a medium has no relation with its physical density or specific gravity. For example, the specific gravity of turpentine oil is 0.87 and that of water is 1. But the refractive index of turpentine oil is 1.47 and that of water is 1.33.

The refractive index of a medium depends on the colour of the incident light. It is greater for blue or violet than for red. The refracted ray in the case of violet light bends more than in the case of red light. The refractive index for yellow light is midway between these two.

So unless otherwise stated, the refractive index of a medium refers to yellow light.

Refractive indices of a few substances:

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Refractive Indices Of A New Substances

Refractive Index and Related Terms

Relation between the velocity of light and refractive index:

According to the wave theory of light, the velocity of light is different in different media. If pt is the absolute refractive index of a medium, then

μ = \(\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }(c)}{\text { velocity of light in that medium }(v)}\)

∴ Speed of light in free space = ft x speed of light in that medium

For any medium μ > 1, so speed of light in a vacuum is greater than that in any medium. Thus, the speed of light is maximum in a vacuum.

Accordingly, if and is the refractive index of the medium b concerning medium a, then

⇒ \(a^{\mu_b}=\frac{\text { velocity of light in medium } a}{\text { velocity of light in medium } b}\)

= \(\frac{v_a}{v_b}\)

Medium b is denser than medium a then aμb > 1 and in this case va>vb.

The velocity of light in a denser medium is less than the velocity of light in a rarer medium. The velocity of light in a medium decreases with the increase of its refractive index.

Thus if the velocity of light in medium b is lesser, i.e., medium b is optically denser, and aμb > 1 i.e., sin i>sinr or i< r. Thus, the angle of refraction is less than the angle of incidence, so the refracted ray bends towards the normal.

From the above discussion, it is clear that refraction variation in the speed of light in different media

Relation between relative refractive index and absolute refractive index:

If μ a and μb are absolute refractive indices of media a and b respectively

⇒ \(\mu_a=\frac{c}{v_a} \text { and } \mu_b=\frac{c}{v_b}\)

So relative refractive index of medium b concerning medium a,

⇒ \({ }_a=\frac{v_a}{v_b}=\frac{\frac{c}{v_b}}{\frac{c}{v_a}}=\frac{\mu_b}{\mu_a}\)

Relation of the wavelength of light with refractive index:

The relative refractive index between two media depends on the wavelength of light. Cauchy’s equation for the dependence of refractive index on the wavelength of light is

⇒ \(\mu=A+\frac{B}{\lambda^2}\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Relation Of Wavelength Of Light

Here A and B are two constants; their values are different in different media. The refractive index of a medium decreases if the wavelength of light increases. The graph shows the variation of n with μ  with λ of BK7 glass.

In a medium apart from free space different coloured light travels at different speeds. In a particular medium red travels the fastest and violet travels the slowest. Thus refractive index of any medium for the red colour is the lowest and that for the violet colour is the highest. This is the reason why white light is dispersed

Relation of temperature with refractive index:

Generally, the refractive index of a medium decreases if the temperature of the medium increases. For a solid medium this change is small, for a liquid it is moderate and for a gas it is remarkable

It is to be remembered that, velocity, intensity and wave¬ length of light change due to refraction but its frequency and phase remain unchanged

WBCHSE class 12 physics notes Generalised Form of Snell’s Law

Let AB be the surface of the separation of two media 1 and 2. Medium 2 is denser and medium 1 is rarer. PO is the incident ray at the point O on the surface of separation and OQ is A the refracted ray at the point O . Let angle of incidence = i1 angle of refraction = i2

By Snells law \(\frac{\sin l_1}{\sin i_2}\)

We known \({ }_1 \mu_2=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

∴ \(\begin{equation}\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin i_2}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1} \quad \text { or, } \mu_1 \sin i_1=\mu_2 \sin i_2\end{equation}\) …………………………. (1)

So for n number of media, it can be written as

\(\mu_1 \sin i_1=\mu_2 \sin i_2=\cdots=\mu_n \sin i_n\) …………………. (2)

This equation is known as the generalised form of Snell’s law

WBCHSE class 12 physics notes

Refraction Of Light Laws Of Refraction Numerical Examples

Example 1. A ray of light is incident from water on the surface of separation of air and water at an angle of 30°. Calculate the angle of refraction in air mu \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Solution:

Let the angle of refraction of the ray of light in the air be r

Since the ray of light is refracted from water to air,

⇒ \(w^\mu{ }_a=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{a^{\mu_w}}=\frac{\sin 30^{\circ}}{\sin r}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{\frac{4}{3}}=\frac{1}{2 \sin r}\)

Or, \(2 \sin r=\frac{4}{3}\)

Or, \(\sin r=\frac{2}{3}\)

= 0.666

= sin 41.8°

or = r= 41.8°

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Refraction In Air

Example 2. A ray of light is incident on a block of glass in such a way that the angle between the refracted ray and the refracted ray is 90°. Determine the relation between the angle of incidence refractive index of
Solution:

Here angle of incidence = i

The angle of reflection = i, angle of refraction = r

The angle between the reflected ray and the refracted ray = 90°

According to the

i+90°+r= 180°

Or, r = 90°-i

The refractive index of glass,

μ = \(\mu=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin \left(90^{\circ}-i\right)}\)

= \(\frac{\sin i}{\cos i}\)

= tan i

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Reflected Ray

Example 3.  The refractive index of glass is 1.5 and the refractive index of water is 1.33. If the velocity of light in glass is 2 × 108 m s1 what is the velocity of light In water?
Solution:

μg = \(\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }}{\text { velocity of light in glass }\left(v_g\right)}\)

Or, velocity light in a vacuum

Again, \(\mu_w=\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }}{\text { velocity of light in water }\left(v_w\right)}\)

Or, Velocity of light in vacuum = μw. vw

μg vg= μw vw

Or, \(\frac{\mu_g v_g}{\mu_w}=\frac{1.5 \times 2 \times 10^8}{1.33}\)

= 2.26x × 108 m s1

Practice Problems on Refractive Index

Example 4. A monochromatic -ray of light-, is refracted from the vacuum. to a medium of refractive index pi. Determine the relation of the wavelengths of light in vacuum and in glass
Solution:

μ = \(\frac{c}{v}=\frac{n \lambda_0}{n \lambda}=\frac{\lambda_0}{\lambda}\)

So, λ0 = μ λ

[Here, c and v are the velocities of light in vacuum and the medium respectively; n = frequency of light, which remains unchanged on refraction λ0, λ = wavelengths in vacuum and in the medium respectively.]

Example 5. If a ray of light is incident on a plate inside the water at an angle of 45°, what is the angle of refraction inside the plate? Given that the absolute refractive Indices of the plate and water are 1.88 and 1.33 respectively.
Solution:

Let the angle of refraction inside,n-rriDT.tile plate be r

Here , \(w^{\mu_g}=\frac{\sin i{ }^0}{\sin r} \text { or, } \frac{\mu_g}{\mu_w}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)

Or, \(\frac{1.88}{1.33}=\frac{\sin 45^{\circ}}{\sin r}\)

Or, in r = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{1.33}{1.88}\) = 0.5

= \(\frac{1}{2}\)= sin 30°

r = 30°

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Example 6. How much time will sunlight take to pass through the glass window of thickness 4 mm ? μ of glass =1.5.
Solution:

Velocity of sunlight in a vacuum or air,

C = 3×10-8m s-1

Thus velocity in a medium of refractive index μ

u = \(v\frac{c}{\mu}\)

So, to cross a thickness d, the time taken by light,

t = \(\frac{d}{v}=\frac{d \mu}{c}\)

= \(\frac{\left(4 \times 10^{-3}\right) \times 1.5}{3 \times 10^8}\)

[here d= 4 mm = 4 ×10m]

= 2 × 10-11 s

Example 7. Green light of wavelength 5460 A°Is incident on an airglass interface. If the refractive index of glass is 1.5 what will be the wavelength of light In glass?
Solution:

The wavelength of the light in air, A0 = 5460 A°

The refractive index of glass concerning air, μ = 1.5

If the wavelength of the light In glass is λ, then

= \(\frac{\lambda_0}{\lambda}\)

Or, λ = \(\frac{\lambda_0}{\mu}=\frac{5460}{1.5}\)

= 3640 A°

WBCHSE class 12 physics notes

Refraction Of Light Deviation Of A Ray

During reflection or refraction, the change In the direction of the tight is called its deviation.

The angle between the refracted ray and the direction of the incident ray gives the measure of deviation.

Deviation of incident ray AO, which after refraction proceeds along OD instead of OC. So the deviation of ray, S = ∠BOC

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Medium Glass And Medium Air

Now, δ = ∠BOC = ∠N’OC- ∠N’OB

= ∠AON- ∠N’OB = i-r

We know. If the angle of Incidence Increases, the angle of refraction also Increases

For normal Incidence, i = 0 thus r = 0 and so δ = 0 (minimum).

For  i = 90°, δ Is maximum

For refraction to a rarer medium from a denser medium, the angle of refraction is greater than the angle of incidence, l.e., r> i.

Now, δ = ∠BOC = ∠N’OB- ∠N’OC

=∠N’OB-  ∠AON =r – i

Optics

Refraction Of Light Image Due To Refraction

Suppose, a beam of rays from a point object after refraction reaches our eyes in another medium. Now if dierefracted rays are produced backwards they are nice at a point It seems that the refracted rays are diverging from die second point. The second point Is the image of the lift’s first point. The image of any point object is formed in the same way. Thus a complete image of the object is formed.

If the object Is situated In a denser medium and Is viewed from a rarer medium, It appears (closer to the surface of separation. For example, If we look at a fish inside water in a pond it appeals nearer to the surface than the actual position.

If the object Is situated in a rarer medium and Is viewed from a denser medium, it appears to move away from the surface of separation, for example, our earth is surrounded by a thick atmospheric layer composed of different gases. Starlight comes to our eyes through this atmosphere. Hence we are the observers on Earth in a denser medium whereas the stars are in a vacuum i.e., in the rarer medium. So, the animal position of a star Is far behind its normal viewing position.

Object In denser medium end eyes In rarer medium:

Let the refractive indices of the two media a and b be μ1 and μ2, respectively and μ11, An object P situated in a is viewed from b. The surface of separation of a and b is a plane surface. A ray of light from P incident perpendicularly at A proceeds along AB without changing its direction. Another oblique ray PC incident at C is refracted along CD.

The refracted rays A B and CP when produced backwards meet at Q . So when the two refracted rays reach the rays of the observer. It will appear as if tyre two rays are coming from Q . So Q h the virtual Image of p.  In this case, the image rises towards the surface of the separation

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Denswe Medium And Eye In Rarer

If the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction are l and r.

⇒ \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{\sin r}{\sin i}=\frac{\tan r}{\tan i}=\frac{A C / A Q}{A C / A P}=\frac{A P}{A Q}\)

For near-normal viewing, points A and C are close enough. So sin0 *s tarif

Hence, \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{\sin r}{\sin i}=\frac{\tan r}{\tan l}=\frac{A C / A Q}{A C / A P}=\frac{A P}{A Q}\)………………………….(1)

If the observer is In the air then μ1  = 1

Putting μ1 = 1 and μ2 =μ  (say) In equation (1) and writing AP = u, AQ =  v

We have \(\mu=\frac{A P}{A Q}=\frac{u}{v}\)

If d is die real deeds of the object then

μ = \(\frac{d}{\text { apparent depth of the object }}\)

Or, Apparent depth of the object = \(\frac{d}{\mu}\)

Hence apparent displacement

x = PQ = AP-AQ = d- \(\frac{d}{\mu}\)

= \(d\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

Therefore, the apparent displacement of an object depends on the real depth (d) of the object and the refractive index (/z) of the denser medium.

The refractive index of water concerning air is|. If an object immersed in water is observed vertically from above the water, then its apparent displacement.

x = \(d\left(1-\frac{1}{4 / 3}\right)=\frac{d}{4}\)

General case:

The apparent depth of an object when viewed from the air through successive media of thicknesses d1 d2, d3 ‘ ……….. dn having refractive indices μ1,  μ2, μ3 ‘ ……….. μn  respectively is

= \(\frac{d_1}{\mu_1}+\frac{d_2}{\mu_2}+\frac{d_3}{\mu_3}+\cdots+\frac{d_n}{\mu_n}=\sum_{i=1}^n \frac{d_i}{\mu_i}\)

Its apparent displacement is

⇒ \(d_1\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu_1}\right)+d_2\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu_2}\right)+d_3\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu_3}\right)+\cdots+d_n\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu_n}\right)\)

= \(\sum_{i=1}^n d_i\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu_i}\right)\)

Object in rarer medium and eye in denser medium:

Let the refractive indices of the two media a and b be μ2 and μ2 respectively and μ2 > μ1 An object P is situated in the medium b and it is seen from the medium. The surface of separation of a and b is a plane surface.

A ray of light from P is incident perpendicularly at point A on the surface of separation and proceeds straight along AB through the medium a without changing its direction. Another oblique ray PC is incident at C and proceeds along CD after j refraction. The refracted rays AB and CD when produced backwards meet at Q. So when the two refracted rays reach the observer, they will.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Rarer Medium And Eye

Appears to him that the two rays are coming from Q. So Q is the virtual image of P. In this case, the image appears to move farther away from the surface of separation.

If the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction of the incident ray at C are i and r respectively, then according to Snell’s law

μ1 sin i= μ2sin r

∴ \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\sin \angle P C N_1}{\sin \angle N C D}\)

Since the two lines PAB and NjCiV are parallel

∠PCN1 = ∠APC and ∠NCD = ∠AQC

⇒ \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{\sin \angle A P C}{\sin \angle A Q C}=\frac{\frac{A C}{C P}}{\frac{A C}{C Q}}=\frac{C Q}{C P}\)

If the points A and C are very close to each other i.e., if the ray PC is not so oblique, then CP ≈ AP and CQ ≈ AQ

∴ \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}=\frac{A Q}{A P}\)…………. (3)

If the rarer medium in which the object is situated is air then = 1.

Putting μ1 = 1 and μ2= p (say) in equation (3) we get

⇒ \(\mu=\frac{A Q}{A P}\)

The refractive index of the denser medium concerning air apparent height of the object from

= \(\frac{\text { the surface of separation }}{\text { real height of the object from the surface of separation }}\)

If the real height of the object, AP = μd, then

= \(\mu\frac{\text { apparent height of the object }(A Q)}{d}\)

Or, AQ = μd ………………… (4)

So the apparent displacement of the object

=PQ = AQ – AP – μd-d = (μ-1) d

WBCHSE class 12 physics notes General case:

The apparent height of an object in the air when viewed from a medium of refractive index pn through successive media of thicknesses d1 d2, d3 ‘ ……….. dn having refractive indices, μ1,  μ2, μ3 ‘ ……….. μn   respectively is

⇒ \(\mu_1 d_1+\mu_2 d_2+\cdots+\mu_n d_n=\sum_{i=1}^n \mu_i d_i\)

Its apparent displacement is

⇒ \(\left(\mu_1-1\right) d_1+\left(\mu_2-1\right) d_2+\cdots+\left(\mu_n-1\right) d_n\)

= \(\sum_{i=1}^n\left(\mu_i-1\right) d_i\)

Let an object in a medium of refractive index fly be viewed from a medium of refractive index  Then we have,

= \(\frac{\text { Apparent depth of the object }}{\text { real depth of the object }}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

=  \({ }^1 \mu_2\)

If the object is situated in a comparatively denser medium, then μ12.

In that case, apparent depth < real depth. If the object is situated in a comparatively rarer medium then μ12 In that case, apparent depth > real depth

Image Formed by Oblique Incident Rays

In the last section, we talked of almost normal viewing. For more B oblique incidence, the apparent displacement is higher

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Oblique Incident Rays

A point object O in an optically denser medium (say, water) is viewed from a rarer medium (say, air), at different angles. For different positions of the observer, the locus of the different positions of the image is a curved line. This curved line is called a caustic curve. The curve has two parts. These two parts meet at a point O’, known as the cusp. The image of an object at O when viewed vertically downward, is formed, at O’.  shows how the images A’, B’, C’, etc. of different points A, B, C, etc. on the base of a vessel or tank containing water will appear to an observer located at a given position. It is evident

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Cusp Of Vertically Downward

The image for normal incidence is at the lowest position. The other images go on rising as the oblique rays from the base produce the images. The image of the base of the vessel will be a curved surface indicated by A’B’C’. With the increase of the distance of the base of the vessel from the eye, the curved surface appears, to rise higher. So if an observer stands in a shallow pond having equal depth everywhere, it appears to him that the pond near his feet is the deepest

Image of an Object under a Parallel Slab

ABCD is a parallel glass slab. Its thickness is d and its refractive index μ,  P is a point object placed in air under the surface AB of the slab. A ray of light PX normally incident on AB goes undeviated along XY. Another ray PQ incident obliquely is refracted along QR. After that, the ray is further refracted along RS. Since the two faces AB and DC of the glass slab are parallel, the rays

PQ and RS will be parallel. So an observer from above the slab will see the image of P at P’. PP’ is the apparent displacement of the point object towards the observer. The normal NQN1 at Q intersects P’R at M. The quadrilateral PP’MQ is a parallelogram

PP’ = QM

The Apparent Displacement of the point object

∴ \(d\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

PQ and RS will be parallel. So an observer from above the slab will see the image of P at P’. PP’ is the apparent displacement of the point object towards the observer.

The normal NQN1 at Q intersects P’R at M. The quadrilateral PP’MQ is a parallelogram.

∴ PP’ = QM

∴ The apparent displacement of the point object

= PP’ = QM

= d(1- \(\frac{1}{\mu}\))

So the apparent displacement of an object does not depend on the position of the object under the lower face of the glass slab. It only depends on the thickness of the slab (d) and the refrac¬ index of its material (μ).

 Optics

Refraction Of Light Some Examples Of Refraction

A coin immersed in water:

A coin is placed at the bottom of a pot such that the coin is just not visible. If eyes are set at the same position and the pot is now filled with water, the coin becomes visible. Because the rays from P are refracted from denser to rarer medium and are bent away from the normal, they reach our eyes. As a result, the refracted rays appear to diverge from P’, i.e., the virtual image of the coin is formed at P’, situated above the coin.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Coin Immersed In Water

A rod partly immersed in water:

Let a straight rod be partly immersed in water. When the rod is held obliquely in water, the portion of the rod in water will appear to be bent upward [Fig. 2.20]. The reason is the same as above. The light rays coming from the portion immersed in water are refracted from denser to rarer medium and hence bent away from the normal. So point A of the rod appears to be raised at B. This happens for every point of the immersed portion of the rod

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Rod Partly Immersed In Water

Object and medium having approximately equal refractive index:

An object becomes invisible when it is sur¬ rounded by a medium having a nearly equal refractive index. Since the refractive indices of both of them are almost the same, negligible refraction does occur from their surface of separation, and for refraction lending of light is negligible. i.e., it travels undefeated. As a result, the surface of separation is not visible. ff99Wt9rf . The refractive indices of glycerine and glass are almost equal. So when a glass rod is immersed in glycerine thiqÿrod is not visible

Multiple images in a thick glass mirror:

If an object is placed in front of a thick mirror with silvered glass at the mirror at the back if a surface object is viewed from a slanting direction, a series of images are formed.

When ray PA is incident on the front face at point A, a very small portion of the light is reflected along AK producing a faint image at P1. The remaining larger portion of the light is refracted into the mirror along AB and is reflected along BC from the silvered surface. A large portion of this reflected ray within the glass comes out along CL producing the second image P2 which is the brightest of all the images.

The remaining part of the ray CD is reflected from surface Y to the silvered surface where it is again reflected. The process continues and gradually fainter images are formed. The different images lie on the line drawn perpendicular to the surface X from the object P.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Multiple Iamges In A Thick Glass Mirror

The ray BC, which is the first reflected ray from the silvered surface, is the brightest and it travels along CL. Consequently, image P2 is the brightest. Hence the brightest second image is considered to be the image of the object. The more oblique the incident rays are, the more the amount of reflection from the front surface of the mirror and the brightness of the image P1 will increase accordingly

Apparent thickness of thick glass mirror:

In the case of a water-filled bowl, the depth of the bowl appears to be less. Similarly, a thick glass mirror seems to be less thick than it is.

We have, \( \frac{\text { real thickness of mirror }}{\text { apparent thickness of mirror }}\)

= Refractive index of glass = \(\frac{3}{2}\)

Therefore, the apparent thickness of a mirror

= \(\frac{2}{3 }\) × Real thickness of the mirror

Refraction Of Light Class 12 Notes

Refraction Of Light Some Examples Of Refraction Numerical Examples

Example 1. There is a mark at the bottom of the beaker. A liquid with a refractive index of 1.4 is poured into it. If the depth then determines how much the (liquid is 3.5 cm mark appears to rise when it is viewed from above.
Solution:

If the object is in a denser medium and the observer is in a rarer medium, the refractive index of the denser medium relative to the rarer medium

= \(\frac{\text { real depth of the object }}{\text { apparent depth of the object }}\)

Or, 1.4 = \(\frac{3.5}{\text { apparent depth of the object }}\)

Or, apparent depth of the object = \(\frac{3.5}{1.4}\)

= 2.5 cm

Apparent upward displacement of the mark

= 3.5 – 2.5 = 1cm

Example 2.  There is a black spot at the bottom of a rectangular glass slab of thickness d and refractive index μ. When the spot is viewed perpendicularly from above, the spot appears to be shifted through a distance \(\frac{(\mu-1) d}{\mu}\) towards the observer. Prove it.
Solution:

The real depth of the black spot from the upper surface of

Let the apparent depth of the black spot from the upper surface of the glass slab be d2

Refractive index of glass \(\mu=\frac{d}{d_1}\)

Or, \(d_1=\frac{d}{\mu}\)

∴ The apparent displacement of the black spot towards the observed

= \(d-d_1=d-\frac{d}{u}\)

= \(d\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)=d\left(\frac{\mu-1}{\mu}\right)\)

Example 3.  In a beaker partly filled with water, the depth of water seems to be 9 cm. On pouring more water into it, the real depth of water is increased by 4cm. Now the apparent depth of water seems to be 12cm. Determine the refractive index of water and the initial depth of water in the beaker.
Solution:

Let the refractive index of water be ft and the initial| depth of water in the beaker be x.

μ = \(\frac{x}{9}\)

or, x = 9μ

When more water is poured into the beaker, the real depth of water becomes (x + 4) cm.

In the second case, μ = \(\frac{x+4}{12}\)

Or, 12 μ = x + 4 or; 12 μ = 9 μ + 4 Or, 3 μ= 4

∴ μ = \(\frac{4}{3}\)

μ = 1.33

Initial depth of water in the beaker.

x = 9 μ = 9 ×  \(\frac{4}{3}\)

= 12cm

Important Definitions in Refraction

Example 4. A small air—bubble exists inside a transparent cube of side 15 cm each. The apparent distance of the bubble observed from one face is 6 cm and from the opposite face its apparent distance becomes 4 cm. Determine the real distance of the bubble from the first face and the refractive index of the material of the cube
Solution:

Let the real distance of the bubble from the first face be x cm.

The real distance of the bubble from the opposite face = (15-x) cm

Let the refractive index of the material of the cube be ft.

We know if the object lies in a denser medium and eye in the rarer medium,

μ = \(\frac{\text { real distance }}{\text { apparent distance }}\)

In the first case , μ=  \(\frac{x}{6}\)

In the second case,  μ  = \(\frac{15-x}{4}\)

⇒ \(\frac{x}{6}=\frac{15-x}{4}\)

Or, 4x = 90- 6x

Or, 10x = 90

Or, x = 9cm and

mu = \(\frac{9}{6}\) = 1.5

Therefore, the real distance of the bubble from the first face is 9 cm and the refractive index of the material of the cube is 1.5

Example 5. A vessel is filled with two mutually immiscible liquids with refractive indices μ1  and μ2. The depths of the two liquids are d1 and d2 respectively. There is a mark at the bottom of the vessel. Show that the apparent depth of the mark when viewed normally is given by \(\left(\frac{d_1}{\mu_1}+\frac{d_2}{\mu_2}\right)\)
Solution:

The image of P is formed at Q due to refraction at the surface of separation B of the 1st and 2nd liquid. Another final image due to refraction in air from the second liquid is formed at R

For the first refraction:

⇒ \(\frac{\mu_1}{\mu_2}=\frac{B P}{B Q}\)

Or, \(B Q=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1} \cdot B P\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1} d_1\)

For the second refraction:

⇒ \(\frac{\mu_2}{1}=\frac{A Q}{A R}\)

Or, \(A R=\frac{A Q}{\mu_2}\)

= \(\frac{1}{\mu_2}(A B+B Q)\)

Or, \(A R=\frac{1}{\mu_2}\left(d_2+\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1} d_1\right)\)

= \(\frac{d_2}{\mu_2}+\frac{d_1}{\mu_1}\)

The apparent depth of the mark P when viewed normally

= AR = \(\frac{d_1}{\mu_1}+\frac{d_2}{\mu_2}\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Mutually Immiscible Liquids

Example 6. A rectangular slab of refractive index [i is placed on another slab of refractive index 3. Both the slabs are of ror. the displacement of the image? the same dimensions. There is a coin at the bottom of the lower slab. What should be the value of n such that when viewed normally from above, the coin appears to be at the surface of separation of the two slabs?
Solution:

Let the thickness of each slab be d. According to the question the apparent depth of the coin =d

d = \(\frac{d}{\mu}+\frac{d}{3}\)

Or, 1= \(\frac{1}{\mu}+\frac{1}{3}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{2}{3}\)

Or, \(\frac{3}{2}\)

= 1.5

Example 7. A tank contains ethyl alcohol of a refractive index of 1.35 The depth of alcohol is 308 cm. A plane mirror is placed horizontally at a depth of 154 cm in it. An; object is placed 254 mm above the mirror. Calculate the apparent depth of the image formed by the mirror
Solution:

Depth of the mirror =1.54 m; object distance from the mirror = 0.254 m

The image of the object is formed at a distance of 0.254 m behind the mirror

= \(\frac{\text { real depth }}{\mu}\)

=\(\frac{1.794}{1.35}\)

= 1.33m

Example 8. A 20mm thick layer of water \(\left(\mu=\frac{4}{3}\right)\) 35mm thick layer of another liquid \(\left(\mu=\frac{7}{5}\right)\) = ‘ in a tank. A small coin lies at the bottom of the tank. Determine the apparent depth of the coin when viewed normally from above the water
Solution:

Real depth of the coin d+d = 20+ 35 = 55m m

∴ A parent depth of the coin

= \(\frac{d_1}{\mu_1}+\frac{d_2}{\mu_2}=\frac{20}{\frac{4}{3}}+\frac{35}{\frac{7}{5}}\)

= 15+ 25

= 40 mm

Refraction Of Light Class 12 Notes 

Example 9. If a point source is placed at a distance of 18 cm from the pole of a concave mirror, its image is formed at a distance of 9 cm from the mirror. A glass slab of thickness 6 cm is placed between the point source and the mirror such that the parallel faces of the glass slab remain perpendicular to the principal axis of the mirror the refractive index of glass is 1.5 what will be the displacement of the image?
Solution:

Let P be the position of the object and in the absence of the glass slab, Q be the position of the image formed by the concave mirror

u = 18 cm,

OQ = v= 9 cm

According to \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) we get,

= \(\frac{1}{-9}+\frac{1}{-18}=\frac{1}{f}\)

Or, f= -6 cm

If the glass slab of thickness 6 cm is placed between the point I source and the concave mirror, apparent displacement of the I Point source will take place towards the mirror. The rays coming from P appear to come from P’ after refraction.

The apparent displacement of P

PP’ = \(d\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

= 6\(\left(1-\frac{1}{1.5}\right)\)

= 2cm

So in the second case, object distance u = -(18- 2) = -16 cm ; f = -6 cm; v = ?

We know, \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) Or, \(\frac{1}{v}+\frac{1}{-16}=\frac{1}{-6}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{v}=\frac{1}{-6}+\frac{1}{16}=\frac{-10}{96}\)

Or, v = \(-\frac{96}{10}\)

= – 9.6 cm

Displacement of the image

QQ’ = OQ’ OQ – OQ = 9.6- 9 = 0.6 cm

Example 10. A plane is made of glass with a thickness of 1.5 cm. Its back surface is coated with memory. A man is standing at a distance of 50 cm from the front face of the mirror. If he looks at the mirror normally, where can he find his image behind the front face of the mirror? The refractive index of glass  = 1.5 
Solution:

The real depth of the mercury-coated surface from the upper surface of the mirror = 1.5 cm

If the apparent depth of the mercury coated mercury  cm, then \(\frac{1.5}{x}\) = 1.5 or, x= 1 cm

So the mercury-coated surface appears to be at n distance of 1 cm from the front face of the mirror.

‘Therefore, the distance of the man from the appetent position of the mercury-coated surface a = 50 +1  cm

So the distance of the Image from the apparent position of the mercury-coated surface =  51 cm

The distance of the Image of the man from the front tuifnee of the mirror =51 + 1 = 52 an

Example 11.  An observer can see the topmost point of a narrow rod of height through a small hole  The rod Is placed Inside a beaker. The beaker’s height is 3h and its radius Is h. When the beaker Is filled up to 2 h of its height with a liquid the observer can see the entire rod. What Is the value of the refractive Index of the liquid?

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Ray Light The Beaker Height And Radius

Solution:

Let us assume that  PQ is a thin straight rod kept in a beaker. B Is a small hole in the wall of the beaker. When the beaker is filled with a liquid up to a height of 2h, then Q can be seen through hole B.

Here, QD ray propagates through the liquid and gets refracted along DB in the air

According to ABRP is a square midpoint of the diagonal PB.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Ray Light MidPoint Of The Diagnoal

Here DE= PE = h

Again, ∠BDP = 45°  [∴ ∠DPE ]

Since the object was placed in the denser medium, according to Snell’s law

⇒ \(\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\frac{Q G}{Q D}}{\sin 45}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{\frac{h}{\sqrt{5 h}}}{\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}}\)

Since,  QD2=QG2+GD2=h2+(2 h)2= 5 h2

Or, \(\frac{1}{\mu}=\sqrt{\frac{2}{5}} \quad \text { of, } \mu=\sqrt{\frac{5}{2}}\)

Therefore, the required refractive Index of the liquid is \(\sqrt{\frac{5}{2}}\)

Example 12. A ray of light Incident at the Interface of glass and water at an angle of Incidence i. If the ray finally emerges parallel to the surface of water Then what will be the value of μg?

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Interface Of Glass

Solution:

When refraction occurs due to the propagation of light rays from glim to water, we may write from Snell’s law,

⇒ \(\mu_g \sin i=\mu_w \sin r\) …………..(1)

Again, when refraction occurs due to the propagation of light rays from water to air, we may write from Snail * law

⇒ \(\mu_g \sin i=\mu_w \sin r\) …………..(2)

Therefore, the required refractive Index of glass is \(\frac{1}{\sin i}\)

Refraction Of Light Critical Angle’s Total Internal Reflection

We know, in refraction from denser to a rarer medium light | bents away from the normal. As a result angle of refraction ’ becomes larger than the angle of incidence.

L line AB represents the surface of the separation of water and air.

Ray P1 O travelling through water is incident at O on the surface- of separation. A part of the ray is reflected into the water along OR1 and another part is refracted into the air along OQ1:  The angle of refraction ∠Q1ON is greater than the angle of incidence ∠P1 ON1. The greater the angle of incidence, the greater the angle of refraction and in each case, both reflection and refraction will take place.

For a particular value of the angle of incidence, the angle of refraction becomes 90°, so that the refracted ray grazes the surface of separation. This limiting angle of incidence in the denser medium is called the critical angle for the two given media. Thus, ∠P2ON1 = critical angle (θc). In this case, the angle of refraction ∠NOQ2 = 90°. Here also a part of the incident ray is reflected to water along OR2.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Critical Angle Of Total Internal Reflection

If the angle of incidence exceeds the critical angle i.e., if i  > θc [as in the case of the incident rayP3O ] no part of the incident ray is refracted in the second medium. The ray is completely reflected along OR3 into the first medium. This phenomenon is called total internal reflection. In this case, the surface of the separation of the two media behaves as a mirror.

Critical angle:

It is that particular angle of incidence of a ray of light for a given pair of media, passing from denser one to rarer one, for which the corresponding angle of refraction is equal to 90 0 and the refracted ray grazes along the surface of the interface separating the two media. The critical angle of a pair of media depends on the colour of the incident light and the nature of the two media.

For example, in the case of two particular media, the critical angle for red light is greater than that for violet light. Again, the critical angle of water to air is 49°, while that of glass to air is 42°. The statement, ‘critical angle of glass to air is 42° ‘ means that a . ray of light from glass being incident on the surface of separation of glass and water at an angle of 42°, should go along the surface of separation after refraction i.e., the refracted angle will be 90°.

Total internal reflection:

When a ray of light travelling from a denser medium to a rarer medium is incident at the surface of separation of the two media at an angle greater than the critical angle for the media, there is no refraction; rather the whole of the incident ray is reflected. This phenomenon is known as total internal reflection.

Refraction of light class 12 notes Condition of total internal reflection:

The conditions to be satisfied for total internal reflection are as follows

  1. The light must travel from a denser to a rarer medium.
  2. The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle for the two media

Reason for using the term “total’:

In ordinary reflection, a part of the incident light is reflected from the surface of separation and the rest is refracted. But in the case of internal reflection, no part of the incident light is refracted, rather the entire portion of the incident light is reflected to the first medium from the surface of separation of the two media. So this reflection is called total reflection.

Relation between critical angle and refractive index of the denser medium:

Let ∠P2ON1 = θc = critical angle between the two media, water and air, which

Impliesair concerning the angle to water of refraction is aμw, which is then 90°. If the refractive index

aμw = \(\frac{\sin \theta_c}{\sin 90^{\circ}}\)

Or,  sin θc = \(\frac{1}{a^{\mu_w}}\)

So, the value of critical depends on the refractive index of one medium concerning another

If the medium is a and b the,

⇒ \(\sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{b^{\mu_a}}=\frac{1}{\begin{array}{r}
\text { refractive index of denser medium } \\
\text {concerning rarer medium }
\end{array}}\)

= \(\frac{\mu_b}{\mu_a}=\frac{\text { absolute refractive index of medium } b}{\text { absolute refractive index of medium } a}\)

Refraction Of Light Critical Angle’s Total Internal Reflection Numerical Examples

Example 1. If the absolute refractive index of a medium is \(\sqrt{2}\), calculate the critical angle of glass to the medium. Given
Solution:

If the refractive index of glass concerning air is aμg, then

aμg= \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta_c}=\frac{1}{\sin 30^{\circ}}\)

= 2

If the refractive index of glass concerning the medium is mμg, then

aμg= \(\frac{a^{\mu_g}}{{ }_a \mu_m}\)

= \(\frac{2}{\sqrt{2}}\)

= \(\sqrt{2}\)

If the critical angle of glass to the medium is #c, then

sin = \(\sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{m^\mu}\)

= \(\frac{1}{m^\mu}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

= sin 45

Or, θc = 45

Example 2.  The refractive index of carbon disulphide for red light is 1.634 and the difference in the values of the critical angle for red and blue light at the surface of separation of carbon disulphide and air is 0°56/. What is the value of the refractive index of carbon disulphide for blue light
Solution:

Let the refractive index of carbon disulphide for red light = and circle angle =

Now, sin θr = \(\frac{1}{\mu_r}=\frac{1}{1.634}\)

= 0.6119 = sin 37.73

θr = 37.73

Let the critical angle for blue light be θb. The refractive index increases as the wavelength of light decreases. So the critical angle decreases.

∴ θbr

According to the Question,

θb = 37.73°-0°.56′

= 37.73°-0.93°

= 36.8°

So refractive index of carbon disulphide for blue light,

μb = \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta_b}=\frac{1}{\sin 36^{\circ} 48^{\prime}}\)

= \(\frac{1}{\sin 36.8^{\circ}}=\frac{1}{0.599}\)

= 1.669

Example 3. The refractive index of-diamond is 2.42,-which proves that all the beams of rays having an angle of incidence of more than 25° will be reflected, [sin 24.41° = 0.4132]
Solution:

If the critical angle is θc then

Sin θc = \(\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{1}{2.42}\)

= 0.4312° = sin 24.41°

θc  = 24.41°

We know that if the angle of incidence of a ray of light is greater than the critical angle, the ray will be reflected. Here the critical angle is 24.41°. So rays of light having an angle of incidence greater than 25° will be reflected

Example 4. A ray of light will go from diamond to glass. What should be the minimum angle of incidence at the surface of separation of the two media, diamond and glass, so that the ray of light cannot be refracted in glass? μ of glass =1.51 and μ of diamond = 2.47; sin37.69° = 0.61134
Solution:

If the light ray is incident at the surface of separation of the two media diamond and glass at a critical angle, the ray is grazingly refracted in the glass. If the critical angle is QQ then

sin θc = \(\frac{1}{g^{\mu_d}}=\frac{1}{\frac{\mu_d}{\mu_g}}\)

= \(\frac{\mu_g}{\mu_d}=\frac{1.51}{2.47}\)

= 0.61134

= sin 37.69°

∴ θc  = 37.69°

So if the angle of incidence of a light ray is greater than 37.69° it | cannot be refracted in glass.

∴  Required minimum angle of incidence =37.69°

Refraction of light physics class 12 Examples of Applications of Refraction

Example 5. cube has a refractive Index μ1. There is a plate of refractive Index μ221) A ray travelling through the air is incident on the side face of the cube. The refracted ray Is an Incident on the upper face of the cube at the minimum angle for total internal reflection to occur. Finally, the reflected ray emerges from the opposite face. Show that if the angle of emergence Is Φ then sin = \(\sqrt{\mu_1^2-\mu_2^2}\)
Solution:

PQ = incident ray on the side face of the cube, QR = refracted ray inside 0′ the cube, S = reflected ray from the upper face of the cube, ST = emergent ray from the opposite face.

Let the critical angle for total reflection be θc

According to the question θ’c ≈θc

⇒ \(\sin \theta_c^{\prime} \approx \sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{2^{\mu_1}}=\frac{1}{\frac{\mu_1}{\mu_2}}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Angle of incidence of the ray RS = l = 90° – θc and angle of refraction -tf>

⇒ \(\sin \theta_c^{\prime} \approx \sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{2^{\mu_1}}=\frac{1}{\frac{\mu_1}{\mu_2}}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)  = Refractive index of air with respect to the cube

= \(\frac{1}{\text { refractive index of the cube with respect to air }}\)

Or, \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin \phi}=\frac{1}{\mu_1}\)

Or, sin Φ = μ1 sin i

= \(\mu_1 \sin \left(90^{\circ}-\theta_c\right)=\mu_1 \cos \theta_c\)

= \(\mu_1, \sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \theta_c}\)

= \(\mu_1 \sqrt{1-\frac{\mu_2^2}{\mu_1^2}}=\sqrt{\mu_1^2-\mu_2^2}\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Cube Refractive Index

Example 6. A ray of light travelling through a denser medium is incident at an angle i in a rarer medium. If the angle between the reflected ray and the refracted ray is 90° show that the critical angle of the two media, \(\theta_c=\sin ^{-1}(\tan i)\) 
Solution:

Suppose the angle of refraction in the medium =r

From  we get

i+ 90° + r = 180°

Or, r = 90° – i

According to Snell’s law.

⇒\(\frac{\sin l}{\sin r}={ }_1 \mu_2=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Or, \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin \left(90^{\circ}-i\right)}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Or, \(\frac{\sin i}{\cos i}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

Or, \(\tan i=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

If the critical angle for the two media is θc, then

⇒ \(\sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{{ }_2 \mu_1}\)

= \(\frac{1}{\frac{\mu_1}{\mu_2}}=\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

= tan i

Or, \(\theta_c=\sin ^{-1}(\tan i)\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Ray Light A Ray Of Light Travelling A Denser Medium

Example 7. A nail Is fixed up perpendicularly at the centre of a circular wooden plate. Keeping the nail at the bottom, the circular plate Is made to float In water. What should be the maximum ratio of the radius of the plate and the length of the nail so that the nail will be out of vision? Refractive index of water \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Solution:

AB Is the circular wooden plate and CD is the nail. Suppose, the radius of the plate =r and the length of the nail =h Since the nail Is not seen from the air, the angle of incidence of the ray DA will be greater than 0 and the ray will be reflected.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Nail Is Fixed Perpendicularly At The Centre

We know, \(\sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{a^\mu{ }_w}=\frac{3}{4}\)

⇒  \(\cos \theta_c=\sqrt{1-\frac{9}{16}}=\frac{\sqrt{7}}{4}\)

⇒ \(\tan \theta_c=\frac{\frac{3}{4}}{\frac{\sqrt{7}}{4}}=\frac{3}{\sqrt{7}}\)

Or, \(\frac{r}{h}=\frac{3}{\sqrt{7}}\)

This is the required ratio

Example 8.  The Critical angle of glass relative to a liquid is 57° 20′. Calculate the velocity of light in the liquid. Given,  μ of glass = 1.58, velocity of light in vacuum = 3×108 m s-1 sin 57° 20′ = 0.8418
Solution:

Critical angle of glass relative to the liquid,

θc = 57°20′

If the refractive index of glass concerning the liquid is {fiR then.

sinθc =\(\frac{1}{\nu_g}=\frac{1}{\frac{\mu_g}{\mu_l}}=\frac{\mu_l}{\mu_g}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\mu_l}{\mu_g}=\sin 57^{\circ} 20^{\prime}\)

= 0.8418

Or, \(\mu_l=0.8418 \times \mu_g=0.8418 \times 1.58\)

Again , \(\mu_l=\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }}{\text { velocity of light in the liquid }}\)

The velocity of the light in the liquid

= \(\frac{3 \times 10^8}{\mu_l}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{0.8418 \times 1.58}\)

= \(2.255 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)

Example 9.  A transparent solid cylindrical rod has a refractive Index of. It Is surrounded by air. A light ray Is Incident at the midpoint of one end of the rod.  Determine the incident angle 8 for which the light ray grazes along the wall of the rod

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Light Ray Grazes Along The Wall Of The Rod

Solution:

For refraction of light at point B, we can write by applying Snell’s law

1 × sin θ = μ sin r

[where μ is the refractive index of the solid material)

or, sin θ = \(\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}} \sin r\) ……………………… (1)

The light ray BC is incident on point C making critical angle θc and propagates along CD

Thus, from Snell’s law,

μ = \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta_c}\)

Or, \(\theta_c=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

=\(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\right)\)

= 60°

r = 180°- (60° + 90°) = 30°

Hence from equation (1), we can write

θc = \(\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}} \sin 30^{\circ}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

Or, \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\right)\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Snells Law

Examples of Total Internal Reflection

A test tube dipped in water: A glass test tube half filled with water is held obliquely in a beaker containing water

The empty portion of the Immersed test tube appears shining if It is seen from above. This happens due to the total internal reflection of light. For the empty portion of the tube, the light goes from a denser to a rarer medium. Rays which are incident at angles greater than the critical angle of glass and air (48.5°) arc are reflected. So this portion of the glass appears shining.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light A Test Tube Dipped In Water

A portion of the tube filled with water does not glow because here light enters water In test tube from water in a beaker. Thus, total internal reflection does not occur here. In this discussion, we do not take into account the existence of the glass wall of the tube due to its negligible thickness.

A metal ball coated wHb lampblack Immersed In water:

If a metal ball coated will lampblack Is Immersed in water, the ball appears shining. Due to the coating of the lamp¬ black. a thin layer of air surrounds the surface of the ball. Rays incident at an angle greater than the critical angle of water and air, are reflected. The ball appears shining when the reflected rays reach the eyes of the observer.

Refraction of light physics class 12 Glass tumbler full of water:

A glass tumbler full of water Is held above eye level. If the upper surface of water In the tumbler is seen from any one side, the surface appears shining. Rays coming from the side of the tumbler are incident on the surface of the separation of water and air. Hence total internal reflection takes place at particular angles of slantness and the surface of the water appears shining.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Glass Tumbler Full Of Water

Air bubbles:

The air bubbles rising through the water look shiny. Rays travelling through water are incident on the surface of the air bubbles. Those rays which are incident at angles greater than the critical angle are reflected. When these reflected rays reach the eyes of the observer, the hubbies appear shining. For the same reason, air bubbles existing In paper weights appear to be shining

Natural Examples Of Total Internal Reflection

Mirage: It Is an optical Illusion brought about by total internal reflection. There are two types of mirage, one observed in hot regions and the other observed In extremely cold regions.

1. Inferior mirage or mirage in the desert:

People travelling through the desert sometimes see water at a distant place which is an optical illusion, called an inferior mirage, or simply, a mirage.

During daytime, the lower regions of the atmosphere become hot¬ ter than the upper regions. So density of air in the lower regions is less than that in the higher regions. Let us consider the atmo¬ sphere to be made up of layers of air, one above the other. A ray of light starting from a distant tree (P) and travelling downward happens to be going from a denser to a rarer medium.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Inferior Mirage Or Mirage In Desert

So its angle of incidence at consecutive layers goes on increasing gradually till it exceeds the critical value when it is reflected due to total internal reflection. The traveller sees an inverted virtual image (P’) of the tree. Secondly, due to continuous temperature changes, there exists a temperature gradient in the layers which undergo a continuous change of density and hence in the refractive index as well. So the path of the rays coming through the layers of air is also continuously changing. Hence to the traveller, the image of the tree appears to be swaying. This completes the illusion of a pond lined with trees.

 2. Superior mirage or mirage in cold countries:

In cold countries, the temperature of air In the lower regions is lower than that of the upper region. So the density of air in the lower region is greater than that of the upper region. A ray of light starting from an object (P) travelling upwards, finds itself going from denser to rarer medium

So its angle of incidence at consecutive layers of air gradually increases till it reaches the critical value. Then it is reflected due to total internal reflection. To an observer, the ray appears to come from a point above, thus giving the impression that an inverted object (P’) is floating in the air which is an optical illusion. This phenomenon is called a superior mirage

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Superior Mirage

View of an observer inside water:

To the eye of an observer or a fish Inside water, all objects above water appear to exist in n cone of semi-vertical angle <19° which Is the critical angle of water and air. This happens due to total Internal reflec¬ tion of light.

If a ray of light travelling from a denser medium is Incident at the critical angle, the refracted ray grazes the surface of separation. Conversely, if a ray of light travelling from a rarer medium is incident at an angle of 90°, the angle of refraction In the denser medium becomes equal to the critical angle. The critical angle of water and air is 49°. So if a ray of light S1A coming from the rising sun AS1, along the surface of water reaches eye E along the direction AE, then the angle of refraction in water becomes 49°

As the eye cannot follow ray AS1, an observer inside water will sec the rising sun along the line EAC and this line will make an angle of 49° with the line OE. Similarly, the setting sun S2 will be seen along the line EBD and this line also will make an angle of 49° with the line OE. So all the objects above water appear to exist in a cone of angle 98° to the eye of a fish or observer underwater.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Eye Of A fish Or Observe Under Water

It Is to be noted that the sun describes an arc of 180° to earthbound observers but to the eyes of a fish it describes an arc of 98°.

1.  Surface of water to the eye of an observer inside water:

The diameter of the circular base of the cone AEB is AB. If an observer keeping his eye on E looks at the circular section of water, he can see any object lying above water. But If the observer looks at the rest of the portion of water other than the circular portion, then

  1. He cannot see any object above water, rather
  2. He can see the images of the objects inside the water.

Reason explaining 1st Incident:

Any ray of light coming from outside water can reach point E only through the circular section but cannot reach point E if it comes through die remaining portion.

Reason explaining 2nd Incident:

Suppose the ray of light emerging from the object situated In water, reaches die point E after reflection from the surface of water. This reflection will take place from the surface of the water excluding the circular portion.

This reflection will be a total reflection. For example, if a ray of light from the object P situated inside water, is incident on the surface of water, the angle of incidence exceeds 49°. So, the ray after total reflection from the surface of the water reaches the eye of the observer and he observes the dead object, at P’.

So to the observer situated inside water, the surface of the water appears as a mirror with a circular hole in it, because he sees the objects situated outside water through the circular section and sees the images of the objects inside water in die remaining action of the surface of the water. The radius of the circular hole is OA or OB.

2. Determination of the radius of the hole:

Let the radius of the hole =OA = OB = r and OE – h. If the critical angle is θ then ∠OEA = Qc

⇒ \(\tan \theta_c=\frac{O A}{O E}=\frac{r}{h}\)

Or, \(r=h \tan \theta_c=h \frac{\sin \theta_c}{\cos \theta_c}\)

= \(h \frac{\sin \theta_c}{\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \theta_c}}\)

Since ( sin \(\theta_c=\frac{1}{\mu}\))

= \(h \frac{\frac{1}{\mu}}{\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{\mu^2}}}\)

r = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}\)

Refraction of light physics class 12 Sparkling of diamond:

Diamond is notable for its sparkle and shine. This characteristic of a diamond is based on total internal reflection. The refractive index of a diamond is 2.42 and its critical angle relative to air is only 24.4°. This value is quite small as compared to other pairs of media.

Therefore, there is a high probability of total internal reflection in the case of diamond. If the diamond is cut properly, it will have a large number of faces. Ray of light entering through one face undergoes total internal reflection at several faces. As the rays of light enter through many faces and are confined inside they emerge together through only a few faces, these faces appear to sparkle and shine

Transmission of Light through Optical Fibre

Optical fibre:

A beam of light can be sent from one place to another through an optical fibre made of glass, quartz or optical-grade plastic, by following successive total internal reflections. As water can be sent from one place to another through a hollow pipe, a fibre can allow light to flow through it from one place to another. Hence, an optical fibre is often loosely called a light pipe.

Construction and principle of action:

An optical fibre is a long and very thin pipe. Its diameter is about 10 × 10-6 metres. The internal section of the die pipe is called the core. It is a die core through which light travels from one point to another. Above the core, there is a coating of a substance having a refractive index less than that of the core. This coating is called cladding.

A ray of light entering die fibre through one face undergoes successive total internal reflections at the surface of separation of core and cladding and emerges through the other face [Fig. 2.38].: As total internal reflection of light takes place inside a fibre, the intensity of the light remains almost the same.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Constraction And Principle Of Action

The image of a large object cannot be sent through a single fibre. In that case, bundles of fibres or cables of fibres are used. A cable contains about a thousand fibres. The image of an object is focused on one end of the bundle. If the order of die fibres is properly maintained, the image obtained at the other end will be an exact reproduction. In, the letter ‘T’ has been focussed at one end of the die bundle and an exact image of ‘T’ has been obtained. Light rays from the different portions of ‘T’ travel through the different fibres and form a die image at the other end

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Different Fibers

Application of optical fibre:

  • Optical fibres are extensively used in medical science and the field of communication.
  • These are used to study the interior parts of the body which are inaccessible to the bare eye, for example, lungs, tissues, intestines etc. It can be used to transmit high-intensity laser light inside the body for medical purposes.
  • These are used for sending signals from one place to another. This signal is mainly digital. It is information that the signal carries.
  • This information is used in telephone, television, fax, computer etc. It is to be noted that, different digital signals may be sent through the same fibre at the same time, without any chance of overlapping.
  • So many times it is needed to collect samples inside from human body to identify disease. For this purpose, optical fibre is used. Besides, optical fibre is used for operation inside the human body. Thus, in most cases, no major excising is needed outer part of the body

Advantages of optical fibre over copper wire:

  • Comparatively less power Is required to send a signal,
  • The loss in energy Is much less
  • The capacity of carrying information is approximately times.
  • There exists no influence of any external electromagnetic wave signal.
  • Electrical resistance is much more.
  • It is very light.
  • killVelocity of the signal is very fast (approximately equal to that of light in vacuum).
  • The possibilities of the illegal usage of the signal are very low.

Refraction Of Light Physics Class 12

Refraction Of Light  Transmission of Light through Optical Fibre Numerical Examples

Example 1. A point source of light is placed at a depth of h below the calm surface of the water. From the source, light rays can only be transmitted to air through a definite circular section,

  1. Draw the circular section of the surface of the water by ray diagram and mark its radius r.
  2. Determine the angle of incidence of a ray of light incident at any point on the circumference of the circular plane. [Given: refractive index of water,\(\frac{4}{3}\) = 48°36′ = sin-1 0.7501 ]
  3. Show that r= \(\frac{3}{\sqrt{7}} h\)

Solution:

Let MN be the open surface of water. O is the source of light at a depth h below the surface of water. Light rays incident on the surface of the water from 0 at angles less than critical angle transmit in air after refraction. At points A and B the light rays are incident at angles equal to the critical angle (θ). So the refracted rays at these two

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Refracted Rays

Points graze along the surface of separation. So the light rays will transmit outside water only through the circular section of radius r =  AP = PB.  If the rays are Incident on the surface of water excluding this circular section, the»7 will be reflected from (be surface of the water and will return to water,

Let the angle of Incidence be θ.

⇒ \(\sin \theta=\frac{1}{a^{\mu_w}}=\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{3}{4}\)

= sin 48°36′ or, = 48° 36′

From the triangle AOP,

⇒ \(\tan \theta=\frac{A P}{O P}=\frac{r}{h} \quad \text { or, } \frac{\sin \theta}{\cos \theta}=\frac{r}{h}\)

Or,\(\frac{\frac{1}{\mu}}{\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{\mu^2}}}=\frac{r}{h}\)

∴ \(\sin \theta=\frac{1}{\mu}\)

Or, \(r=\frac{h}{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}=\frac{h}{\sqrt{\frac{16}{9}-1}}=\frac{3}{\sqrt{7}}\)

Example 2.  The water in a pond has a refractive Index| of light and is placed 4 m below the surface of the water. Calculate the minimum radius of an opaque disc that needs to be floated on water so that light does not come out.
Solution:

Minimum radius of the opaque disc,

r = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}=\frac{4}{\sqrt{\left(\frac{5}{3}\right)^2-1}}\)

= \(\frac{4}{\frac{4}{3}}\)

= 3m

Conceptual Questions on Lenses and Mirrors

Example 3. Shows a longitudinal cross-section of an optical fibre made of glass with a refractive index of 1.68. The pipe is coated with a material of a refractive index of 1.44. What is the range of the angles of the incident rays with the axis of the pipe for which total reflection inside the fibre can take place?

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Longitudinal Cross Section

Solution:

The refractive index of the outer coating concerning the glass pipe

⇒ \(g_g \mu_c=\frac{a^{\mu_c}}{a^{\mu_g}}=\frac{1.44}{1.68}\)

If the critical angle for the total reflection is θ, then

sinθ = \(\frac{1}{c^{\mu_g}}\)

= \(\frac{1.44}{1.68}\)

= 0.857 or, 59°

Thus’ total reflection takes place when i’ > 59° or when r < rmaxwhere rmax= 90° – 59° = 31°

So if the maximum angle of incidence on the fibre is imax then,

sin imax  = μgsir r max= 1.68 sin 31° = 0.865

Imax  = 60°

So, the range of the angles of incidence for total internal reflection inside the fibre is from 0° to 60°.

Example 4. In which direction will the sun appear to set if the observer is inside the water of a pond? Refractive index of water, μ – 1.33.
Solution:

For a setting sun, the incident rays graze along the surface of the water, i.e., angle of incidence = 90°

∴ According to Snell’s law

μw= \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r} \)

Or,   1.33 \(=\frac{\sin 90^{\circ}}{\sin r}\)

sir r  = \( \frac{1}{1.33}\)

= 0.7518

= sin 48.75°

r = 48.75°

Therefore, to see the setting sun the observer in water should look at an angle of 48.75° with the normal.

Refraction Of Light Atmospheric Refraction

Apparent position Of a star: The whole atmosphere surrounding the earth may be supposed to be divided into different horizontal layers. As the height above the earth’s surface increases, the density of the air decreases. Due to this, the refractive index of air also decreases with the increase in altitude. For this reason, the ray from a star S (say) proceeding towards the earth’s surface cannot travel straight but continually bends towards the normal at the surface of separation due to refraction as it penetrates from rarer to denser layers

This ray after several refractions reaches the observer at O. But our vision cannot follow the curved path OS. A tangent OS’ is drawn on OS at O . So, the observer sees the star at S’. This phenomenon is called atmospheric refraction.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Atmospheric Refraction

Visibility of the sun before sunrise and after sunset:

The diameter of the sun subtends an angle of 0.5° at the eye of an observer on Earth. This value is equal to the deviation of sun¬ light due to atmospheric refraction, when at the horizon. So, the sun appears to just touch the horizon during sunset and sunrise when it is actually below it. What we see therefore is the raised image of the sun, formed due to atmospheric refraction. As a result, we see the sun a few minutes after sunset or before sunrise. Now, the sun covers a distance equal to its diameter in 2 min.

So, the sun becomes visible another 2 min earlier at sunrise and also remains visible for another 2 min after the actual sunset. Consequently, 4 min are added to the length of a day. This value is valid for observations from the equatorial region. At higher latitudes, this time increases

The oval shape of the sun when It Is near the horizon:

During sunrise or sunset, the lower edge of the sun remains nearer to the horizon than its upper edge. So, the rays coming from the lower edge of the sun are incident on an atmospheric layer at a larger angle than that for the rays coming from its upper edge. As the refracting angle increases with the increase of the incident angle, the rays coming from the lower edge bend more than the others due to multiple refractions at different atmo¬ spheric layers. As a result, the vertical diameter of the Sun appears to be reduced whereas the horizontal diameter remains unaffected.

Twinkling of Stars:

Due to atmospheric refraction, we see the stars twinkle. Light rays from the stars situated far and far away from us come to our eyes passing through various layers of air. The temperature of the layers does not remain constant and changes continuously. So the density of the various layers also. changes.

Again the refractive index of the layers changes with the change of density. So, when the rays of light from a star come to our eyes, the direction of the path of the rays changes continuously. As a result, the amount of light reaching our eyes also changes continuously. It seems as if the brightness of the stars is changing. So the stars appear twinkling.

As the planets are nearer to us than the stars, more amount of light comes to us. Therefore, the change in brightness of the planets due to changes in the refractive index of various layers of air is negligible. We cannot detect it with our eyes. So it appears that the planets are emitting light steadily.

Class 12 Physics Refraction Notes

Refraction Of Light Thin Prism

Thin Prism Definition:

The prism, whose refracting angle is very small (not more than 10°), is called a thin prism.

Deviation produced by a thin prism:

ABC is a thin prism. A ray PQ is incident on the refracting face AB nearly normally. For nearly normal incidence, i1 ≈ 0, i2≈0. If n is the refractive index of the material of the prism, then

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}=\frac{i_1}{r_1} \quad \text { or, } i_1=\mu r_1\)

And \(\mu=\frac{\sin i_2}{\sin r_2}=\frac{i_2}{r_2} \quad \text { or, } i_2=\mu r_2\)

Or,

So, the deviation of the ray

⇒ \(\delta=i_1+i_2-A=\mu r_1+\mu r_2-A=\mu\left(r_1+r_2\right)-A\)

= μA – A

Since = r1+r2 = A

= (μ- 1)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Deviation Produced By A Prism

Again, if the ray PQ is incident on the face AB normally, then

i1= r1 = 0. So, A = r2
.
Therefore, the deviation of the ray,

δ = i1 + i2 – A = μr2-A =μA-A = (μ -1 )A

So, for normal and nearly normal incidence, the deviation of the array in a thin prism, δ = (μ-1)A

Thus it is seen that for normal or nearly normal incidence, the deviation of a ray in a thin prism depends only on the refract¬ ing angle of the prism and the refractive index of its material but not on the angle of incidence. So if the angle of the incidence is small, the deviation of a ray in the case of a thin prism remains constant.

Refraction Of Light Thin Prism Numerical Examples

Example 1. A very thin prism deviates a ray of light through 5°. If the refractive index of the material of the prism is 1.5, what is the value of the angle of the prism?
Solution:

The angle of deviation for a thin prism,

δ = (μ-1)A

Here  δ = 5° and μ = 1.5

Therefore from equation (1) we get,

5° = (1.5 -1)A or, A = 10°

Example 2. A prism haying refracting angle 4°. Is placed in the air. Calculate the angle of deviation of a ray incident nor¬ mally or nearly normally on It. The refractive index of the material of the prism| = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
Solution:

The refracting angle of the prism, A = 4°. So it is a thin prism. We know that the deviation of a ray in a thin prism for. normal or nearly normal incidence is given by,

⇒  \(\delta=(\mu-1)\)A

⇒ \(\delta=\left(\frac{3}{2}-1\right) \times 4^{\circ}\)

= 2°

Example 3. A thin prism with a refracting angle of 5° and having refractive index of 1.6 is kept adjacent to another thin prism having a refractive index of 1.5 such that one is inverted concerning the other. An incident ray falling vertically on the first prism passes through the second prism without any deviation. Calculate the refracting angle of the second prism.
Solution:

According to the condition,

1– 1)A2 = (μ2– 1)A2

(1.6-1) × 5° = (1.5-1)A2

Or, A2 =\(\frac{0.6 \times 5^{\circ}}{0.5}\)

So the refracting angle of the second prism = 6°

Limiting Angle of a Prism for No Emergent Ray

A ray of light incident on a refracting surface of a prism may not emerge from the second refracting surface. It depends on the refracting angle of the prism. Every prism has a limiting value of its refracting angle. Light can emerge from the prism if the angle of the prism is equal to or less than this critical value, otherwise, no light can emerge from the prism.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Limiting Angle Of A Prism For No Emergent Ray

Let ABC be the principal section of a prism  PQRS is the path of a ray through the prism placed in the air where ray RS grazes along the second face AC.

Let the angles of incidence and refraction at the face AB be i1 and r1 respectively and the corresponding angles at the face AC be r2 and i2, where i2 = 90°.

So, r2 = θc, the critical angle between glass and air. If the refracting angle of prism A is equal to the limiting angle, then the ray incident at an angle of incidence fj to the face AB of the prism makes a grazing emergence along the second refracting surface AC

A= r1+r2 ……………….(1)

For refraction at Q

⇒ \(\sin i_1=\mu \sin r_1 \quad \text { or, } r_1=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sin i_1}{\mu}\right)\)

For refraction At R,

⇒ \(\sin 90^{\circ}=\mu \sin r_2 \quad \text { or, } r_2=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

Or, \(\theta_c=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

From equation (1) we get, A = \(A=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sin i_1}{\mu}\right)+\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\) …………. (2)

Special cases:

Limiting angle of the prism for normal incidence on the first face: When ray, PQ is incident on the face AB normally, then fj = 0. In this case, if the emergent ray grazes along the surface AC then from equation (2) we get,

A = \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sin 0}{\mu}\right)+\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)=\theta_c\)

Hence, the ray can emerge from the prism through its second surface till the refracting angle of the prism remains less than its critical angle. But as the refracting angle of the prism becomes greater than its critical angle, no ray emerges from the surface AC. Then the face AC acts as a total reflecting surface.

Limiting angle of the prism for grazing incidence on the first face:

For grazing incidence on the face AB, i1 = 90° Then from equation (2) we get

A = \(=\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sin 90^{\circ}}{\mu}\right)+\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

= \(\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)+\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)=2 \sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)=2 \theta_c\)

So, if the refracting angle of the prism is greater than 20C and if a ray is incident on the face AB grazing the surface, then it will be reflected from the face AC. It means the ray will not emerge in the air through the face AC. Hence, no emergent ray will be obtained.

Thus, from the above discussions we conclude that for any incidence no ray can emerge from the prism If the angle of the prism is greater than twice the critical angle for the material concerning the surrounding medium.

Refraction Of Light Limiting Angle Of Incidence For No Emergent Ray From A Given Prism

Just like a prism has a limiting refracting angle for no emergent ray, a prism with a definite refracting angle also possesses a limiting angle of incidence for no emergent ray from it. If the angle of incidence i1 becomes less than this limiting incident angle, then there will be no corresponding emergent ray.

Let ABC be the principal section of a prism. The ray of light PQ is incident at Q on the face AB. After refraction through the prism, the emergent ray RS grazes the second face AC of the prism.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Limiting Angle Of Incidence For No Emergent Ray From A Given Prism

Let the angles of incidence and refraction at the face AB be i1 and r1 the corresponding angles at the face AC be r2 and i2 respectively. Here, i2 = 90° .

Now, the angle of the prism, A = r1 + r2 – constant.

From, A = r1 + r2; we get, r2 = A – r1 , reduces with the decrease of it. Again, r1 increases with the decrease of r1

Now, if r2 is greater than θc the ray QR is reflected from the face AC inside the prism and it does not emerge in the air.

So when r1 = θc then i1 = limiting angle of incidence.

If μ is the refractive index of the material of the prism then

⇒ \(\sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{\mu}\)

⇒ \(\cos \theta_c=\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \theta_c}=\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{\mu^2}}=\frac{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}{\mu}\)

Considering the refraction of the ray at Q we have,

⇒ \(\cos \theta_c=\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \theta_c}=\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{\mu^2}}=\frac{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}{\mu}\)

= \(\cos \theta_c=\sqrt{1-\sin ^2 \theta_c}=\sqrt{1-\frac{1}{\mu^2}}=\frac{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}{\mu}\)

= \(\sin i_1=\mu \sin r_1=\mu \sin \left(A-r_2\right)\)

Since A = r1+r2

= \(\mu \sin \left(A-\theta_c\right)=\mu\left[\sin A \cos \theta_c-\cos A \sin \theta_c\right]\)

= \(\mu\left[\sin A \cdot \frac{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}{\mu}-\cos A \cdot \frac{1}{\mu}\right]\)

= \(\mu\left[\sin A \cdot \frac{\sqrt{\mu^2-1}}{\mu}-\cos A \cdot \frac{1}{\mu}\right]\)

= \(\sin A \sqrt{\mu^2-1}-\cos A\)

Or, i1 = \(i_1=\sin ^{-1}\left[\sin A \sqrt{\mu^2-1}-\cos A\right]\)

This is the limiting angle of incidence. If the angle of incidence is less than this limiting angle, no ray will emerge from the second face of the prism

Class 12 physics refraction notes

Refraction Of Light Limiting Angle Of Incidence For No Emergent Ray From A Given Prism Numerical Examples

Example 1. To get an emergent ray from a right-angled prism its refractive index should not exceed \(\sqrt{2}\) —prove it.
Solution:

The condition of getting an emergent ray from a prism is that the refracting angle of the prism should be equal to or less than twice the value of the critical angle

A≤ 2θc Or, 90°≤ 2θ

Or, θc ≥ 45°

∴ sin θc ≥ sin 45° ,Or, sin θc ≥ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

∴  \(\sin \theta_c=\frac{1}{\mu}\)

∴ \(\frac{1}{\mu}\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Or, \(\sqrt{2}\)

Example 2. The refractive index of a prism having a refracting angle of 75° is \(\sqrt{2}\). What should be the minimum angle of incidence on a refracting surface so that the ray will emerge from the other refracting surface of the prism?

Solution: According to the question, the emergent angle is i2 = 90°.

So for refraction at the second face of the prism

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_2}{\sin r_2}=\frac{\sin 90^{\circ}}{\sin r_2}\)

Or, \(\sin r_2=\frac{1}{\mu}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

= sin 45°

Or, r2 = 45°

We, know A= r1 +r2

75= r1 + 45°

Or, r1 = 30°

For refraction at the first face

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}\)

Or, \(\sqrt{2}=\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin 30^{\circ}}\)

Or, \(\sin i_1=\sqrt{2} \times \frac{1}{2}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

= sin 45°

Or, i1 = 45°

The required angle of incidence = 45°

Real-Life Scenarios in Refraction Experiments

Example 3. Find the value of the limiting angle of incidence if the refractive index of the material of the prism is 1.333 and the angle of the prism is 60°
Solution:

Here, the refractive index of the material of the prism, mu = 1.333; the angle of the prism, A = 60°

⇒ \(i_L=\sin ^{-1}\left[\sin A \sqrt{\mu^2-1}-\cos A\right]\)

= \(\sin ^{-1}\left[\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2} \sqrt{(1.333)^2-1}-\frac{1}{2}\right]\)

= \(\sin ^{-1}(0.2633)\)

= 15.27°

Example 4. The refracting angle of the prism is 60° and its refractive J index is Jl. What should be the minimum angle of | incidence on the first refracting surface so that the ray | can emerge somehow from the second refracting our face?
Solution:

Let i be the limiting angle of incidence, then

sin i = \(\sqrt{\mu^2-1} \cdot \sin A-\cos A\)

= \(\sqrt{\frac{7}{3}-1} \cdot \sin 60^{\circ}-\cos 60^{\circ}\)

= \(\frac{2}{\sqrt{3}} \cdot \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}-\frac{1}{2}\)

= \(1-\frac{1}{2}=\frac{1}{2}\)

i = 30

Example 5. The refractive index of the material of a prism is \(\)  and the refracting angle is 90°. Calculate the angle of minimum deviation and the corresponding angle of incidence. Show that the limiting angle of incidence for getting emergent ray is 45°
Solution:

Here, the refractive index of the material of the prism,

M = \(\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}}\)

The angle of prism A =  90°

μ = \(\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

Or, \(\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}}=\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin 45^{\circ}}\)

⇒ \(\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}=\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}} \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)  = sin 60°

⇒  \(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\)  = 60°

Or, A + δm = 120°

δm = 120° – 90° = 30°

For minimum deviation, i1= i2

δm = i1+ i2 -A

30° = 2i1 – 90

Or, 2i1 = 120°

Or, i2= 60°

Or minimum deviation angle of indecency = 60

To obtain the emergent ray I be the limiting angle of incidence. Then

sini = \(\sqrt{x^2-1} \sin x-\cos 4\)

= \(\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}-1} \cdot \sin 90^{\circ}-\cos 90^{\circ}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)

= sin 45°

= 45°

Example 6. The refractive index of a prism is \(\sqrt{2}\). A ray of light is incident on the prism grazing along one of its refracting surfaces. What should be the limiting angle of the prism for no emergent ray from the other face?
Solution:

If The limiting angle of the prism for no emergent ray is A, then

A = \(2 \sin ^{-1} \frac{1}{\mu}\)

= \(2 \sin ^{-1} \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=2 \times 45^{\circ}\)

= 90°

Refraction Of Light Conclusion

1. When a ray of light enters a medium from another medium through the interface of the two media, then the path of the rav changes its direction and this phenomenon is known as refraction of light.

2. Laws of refraction:

  • The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal to the refracting surface at the point of incidence lie on the same plane.
  • The sine of the angle of incidence bears a constant ratio to the sine of the angle of refraction. The value of this constant depends on the nature of the pair of media concerned and the colour of the incident light.

3. Relative refractive index:

When a ray of light is refracted from a medium a to another medium b then the ratio of the sine of the angle of Incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is called the refractive index of the medium b concerning the medium a. This refractive index is called the relative refractive index.

4. Absolute refractive index:

When a ray of light is refracted from the vacuum to any other medium then the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is called the absolute refractive index of that medium.

5. Critical angle:

When a ray of light is refracted from a denser medium to a rarer medium than for a particular angle of incidence in the denser medium, the angle of refraction in the rarer medium is 90° i.e., the refracted ray grazes along the interface of the .two media. Then that particular angle of incidence is called the critical angle for the pair of media.

6. Total internal reflection:

While passing from a denser medium to a rarer medium, if a ray of light is incident on the surface of separation between the angle greater than the critical angle for the two media involved, the ray of light is reflected to the denser medium without undergoing refraction in the rarer medium. This phenomenon is known as the total internal reflection of light.

Through optical fibres tight rays can be transmitted from one place to another in the straight or curved path by successive total internal reflections. f If a ray of light from a rarer medium is incident on a prism of denser medium then after refraction through the prism, the ray of tight bends towards the base of tyre prism. -f In the case of reflection or refraction, the change of direction of tight is called deviation.

4- Minimum deviation:

For any prism, there is a certain angle of incidence for which the angle of deviation becomes minimum or the least. This angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation for the prism.

At minimum deviation, the angle of incidence becomes equal to the angle of emergence.

5. Thin prism:

If the refracting angle of a prism is very small (not more than 10° ) then it is called a thin prism.

6. Total reflecting prism:

If the principal section of a prior made of crown glass is a right-angled isosceles triangle then the prism makes a total Internal reflection of light for any incidence on it hence this type of prism is called a total reflecting prism.

7. During the refraction of light, the velocity, intensity and wavelength of light change but its frequency and phase remain constant.

8. If there is a parallel glass slab in the path of light then Ugh rays remain undefeated after refraction through it but lateral displacement of light rays will occur.

9.  \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}={ }_a \mu_b=\frac{\mu_b}{\mu_a}\)

μa = absolute refractive index of medium a, nb = absolute refractive index of medium b, afib = relative refractive index of medium b concerning the medium a.

10.  \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}={ }_a \mu_b=\frac{\mu_b}{\mu_a}\)

[ va = velocity of light in the medium a, vb= velocity of tight in the medium b ]

⇒  \(\mu=\frac{c}{v}\)

[n = absolute refractive index of a medium, v = velocity of light in that medium, c = velocity of tight in vacuum]

[v= – frequency of the wave, A = wavelength]

11. \(a^{\mu_b}=\frac{v_a}{v_b}\)

The relation between (i and A given by scientist Cauchy

12. \(\mu=\frac{c}{v}\)

Deviation of a ray of tight due to refraction,

= i~r [i = angle of incidence, r = angle of refraction]

13. Lateral displacement of a ray of tight after suffering refraction through a parallel plate glass slab

= \(t \sin i_1\left[1-\frac{\cos i_1}{\sqrt{\mu^2-\sin ^2 i_1}}\right]\)

[where, i- the angle of incidence on the front surface of the tin slab, t = thickness of the slab, (J- = refractive index of the material of the slab]

If the angle of incidence ij is very small then lateral displacement = \(t i_1\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

14. General formula ofSnell’s law:

μ1 sin= μ2sin2 =  μ3 sin3 = ………………. = μ3 sin i3

15. The apparent position of an object due to refraction:

The refractive index of rarer medium =; refractive index c denser medium = μ1

1. If the object is in a denser medium and the observer is in: a rarer medium:

The refractive index of the denser medium with respect to the rarer medium real depth of the object from
= \(=\frac{\text { the surface of separation }(d)}{\text { apparent depth of the object from the surface of separartion}}\)

= \(\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}\)

2. If the object Is In the rarer medium and the observer is in a denser medium: The refractive index of the denser medium concerning the rarer medium apparent height of the object from

= \(\frac{\text { the surface of separation }\left(d^{\prime}\right)}{\text { real height of the object from the surface of separation (d)}}\)

16. The refractive index of glass

=\(\frac{\text { real thickness of a thick mirror }}{\text { apparent thickness of a thick mirror }}\)

⇒ \(\frac{1}{b^{\mu_a}}=\frac{\mu_b}{\mu_a}\)

[where, A = r1+r2]

17. Deviation of a ray of light after refraction through a prism,

[i = angle of incidence on the first face of the prism, i’μa = angle of emergence from the second face to the prism, r1

= angle of refraction In the first face, = angle of incidence in the second face, A = refracting angle of the prism]

18. In case of minimum deviation, i1 = i2 = i (say)

r1 = r2 = r (say)

19. In that case, the minimum deviation, δ

m = 2i-r and A = 2r.

20. Relation between refractive index (fi) and minimum deviation (8m ) :

μ\(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

21. For the normal and nearly normal incidence of a ray of light, deviation in the case of a thin prism,

⇒ δ = (μ-1)A

22. Limiting the angle of a prism for no emergent light from a prism

⇒ \( \sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{\sin i_1}{\mu}\right)+\sin ^{-1}\left(\frac{1}{\mu}\right)\)

When iy = 0 , then A>θc; when iy = 90°, then A >2θc.

Limiting value of the angle of incidence in case of definite prism for no emergent light from it,

⇒\(i_1=\sin ^{-1}\left[\sin A \sqrt{\mu^2-1}-\cos A\right]\)

23. A ray of light passes through n number of media of refractive indices, μ1,  μ2, μ3, ……………….. μn respectively. The planes of the media are parallel. If the emergent ray from the n -th medium is parallel to the ray incident on the first medium, then μ1 = μ2

24. For a hollow prism, the angle of the prism is A ≠ 0 but the angle of deviation is δ = 0.

25. A container of depth 2d is half filled with a liquid of refractive index μ1 and μ2    the remaining half is filled with another liquid of refractive index When seen from the top, the apparent depth of the container is

⇒ \(d\left(\frac{1}{\mu_1}+\frac{1}{\mu_2}\right)\)

26. An observer is situated at a depth h in a water body. The water surface appears as a porous circular mirror to

 27. If a parallel plane glass slab of thickness t is kept in the path of a beam of converging rays, then the displacement of the intersecting point of the rays,

⇒ \(O O^{\prime}=x=\left(1-\frac{1}{\mu}\right) t\)

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light PArallel Plane Glass Slab Of Thickness

To transmit through a glass slab of thickness t and refractive index μ, time taken by light is, where c is the velocity of light in vacuum \(\frac{\mu t}{c}\)

WBCHSE Physics Class 12 Refraction Notes

Refraction Of Light Very Short Questions

Question 1. What is the angle of deviation due to the refraction of a ray of light incident perpendicularly on a refracting surface?
Answer: Zero

Question 2. Arrange the following media according to the increasing optical density Air, diamond, glass, water, glycerine.
Answer:

Air < Water < Glycerine < Glass < Diamond]

Question 3. Can the value of absolute refractive index of a medium be
Answer: No

Question 4. State the relation of velocity of light with refractive index
Answer:

⇒ \(\left[\mu=\frac{c}{v}\right]\)

Question 5. The refractive index of a medium depends on temperature’—is the statement correct or wrong?
Answer: Correct

Question 6. Arrange the following media according increasing velocity of light through them: vacuum, diamond, water, air, glass
Answer:

Diamond < Glass < Water < Air < Vacuum

Question 7. Does the velocity of light in a vacuum depend on

  1. Wavelength of light
  2. Frequency of light
  3. Intensity of light?

Answer: No

Question 8 If water is heated, how refractive index it will change?
Answer: Decrease

Question 9. The refractive index of glass is 1.5. What is the velocity of light
Answer: [2 × 108m/s].

Question 10. Can the relative refractive index of a medium concerning another be less than unity?
Answer: Yes

Question 11. The refractive index of a medium is a physical quantity having no dimension and no unit—is the statement true or
Answer: True

Question 12. A light ray of wavelength 4500 A enters a glass slab of refractive index 1.5, from the vacuum. What is the wavelength of light inside the slab?
Answer: 30000 A°

Question 13. For which colour of light is the refractive index of glass the minimum?
Answer: Red

Question 14. If the frequency of light increases will there be any change in the refractive index of the medium?
Answer: No

Question 15. For which colour of light is the refractive index of glass a maximum?
Answer: Violet

Question 16. Does the refractive index of glass depend on the colour of light? If so, how?
Answer: Yes, the refractive index increases with the decrease of wavelength

Question 18. When a ray of light is incident on a plane normally, then what is the value of the angle of refraction?
Answer: Zero

Question 17. If for refractive index of water relative to air is \(\), what will be the refractive index of air relative to water
Answer:

⇒ \(\frac{3}{4}\)

Question 18. When light travels from air to glass, how does its wavelength change? less than 1
Answer: Wavelength decreases

Question 19. The absolute refractive index of water and glass are \(\frac{4}{3}\) and \(\frac{3}{2}\). What is the ratio of velocity of light in glass and water?
Answer: [8:9]

Question 20. what is the value of the product of the refractive index of relative of the first medium and that of the first-second medium relative to the second medium?
Answer: 1

Question 21. For what angle of incidence the lateral shift produced by a parallel-sided glass plate is zero?
Answer: For i = 0

Question 22. For what angle of incidence the lateral shift produced by a parallel-sided glass plate is maximum?
Answer: For i = 90°

Question 23. what is the maximum lateral shift produced by a parallel-sided glass plate of thickness t?
Answer: t

Question 24. The bird descends vertically downwards in the direction of a pond during its flight. To a fish which is underwater and directly below the bird, what will be the apparent position of the bird?
Answer:

The bird’s apparent position will be slightly above its actual position i.e., the bird will appear higher up than it is

Question 25. An object lying inside a pond is viewed by a man from above (air) along a horizontal plane. Now if the man moves away from the object keeping his eyes along the same horizontal plane, how will the apparent depth of the object change?
Answer: Decrease along the caustic curve

Question 26. A transparent cube of glass of refractive index n and thickness ‘t is placed on a spot of ink drawn on white paper. When the spot is viewed from above (air) normally, the spot appears to shift through a distance of At towards the observer. What is the value of Δt?
Answer:

⇒ \(\left[\left(l-\frac{1}{\mu}\right) t\right]\)

Question 27. If a straight rod is held obliquely in water how does the immersed portion of the rod appear?
Answer: Refraction of light

Question 28. Multiple images are formed in a thick mirror. Which Image looks brightest?
Answer: Second images

Question 29. If a completely transparent object has to be made Invisible In a vacuum, what should be the value of its relative Index?
Answer: 1

Question 30. What Is the critical angle of light when passing from water \(\left(\mu \text { of water }=\frac{4}{3}\right)\)
Answer: 49

Question 31. For which colour of light is the critical angle between glass and air minimum?
Answer: Violet

Question 32. What are the factors of light which are responsible for creating mirages?
Answer: Refraction and total internal reflection]

Question 33. In which direction do we have to look to see the setting sun if we are underwater? (μw = 1.33)
Answer: At an angle of 49° with the normal drawn at the surface of the water]

Question 34. From sunrise to sunset, the sun subtends an angle of 180’ to our eyes. What will be the value of this angle to an observer underwater?
Answer: 98°

Question 35. Light passes through an optical fibre following which physical phenomenon?
Answer: Total internal reflection

Question 36. What is the approximate value of the refractive index of a diamond
Answer: 2.42

Question 37. what kind of image is formed in a desert by the formation
Answer: Virtual

Does critical depend on the colour of life

Question 38. The angular altitude at which we see a star is not its actual angular altitude’—is the statement true or false?
Answer: True

Question 39. The sun appears to be elliptical during sunset. What is the reason behind it?
Answer: Refraction of light

Question 40. Under what condition the angle of deviation of a refracted ray through a prism will be minimal?
Answer: If the angle of incidence and the angle of emergence are equal

Question 41. If the medium surrounding the four faces of a prism is denser an the entire material of the prism, then in which direction will the light rays bend when emerging from the prism?
Answer: It will bend upwards, towards the prism apex

Question 42. How can an inverted image be made erect by using a total reflecting prism?
Answer: By total internal reflection on the hypotenuse of a right-angled

Question 43. ‘When light travels from a rarer medium to a prism which is a denser medium, a light ray bends towards the base of the prism. Is the statement true or false?
Answer: True

Question 44. At the position of minimum deviation, what is the nature of the path of a light ray through a prism?
Answer: Symmetrical

Question 45. For a thin prism on what factor does the magnitude of the angle of deviation of light rays depend?
Answer: Angle of incidence

Question 47. what will be the angle of deviation of a ray of light incident normally on any smaller side of a total reflecting prism?
Answer: 90°c

Refraction Of Light Fill In The Blanks

Question 1. Which of the following_________________wavelength, frequency or velocity does not change during the refraction of light?
Answer: Frequency

Question 2. For any particular medium, the refractive index is greater If the wavelength of light is____________________ 
Answer: Small

Question 3. If μa,  μb and μc are the absolute refractive indices of three media then aμb × bμc  _________________________
Answer: aμc

Question 4. When a man stands inside a shallow pond the depth of water at that place appears___________________places appear comparatively___________________ and the depth of other 
Answer: Maximum, Less

Question 5. Critical angle of which pair of medium is lesser___________air and water or air and diamond
Answer: Air and Diamond

Question 6. We see the sun ___________________ a few minutes ___________________ sunset or sunrise
Answer: After, Before

Question 7. If a ray of light moves from a ___________________ medium to a ___________________, total internal reflection does not take place
Answer:
Rarer, Denser

WBCHSE physics class 12 refraction notes

Refraction Of Light Assertion Reason Type

Direction: These questions have statement 1 and statement 2 of the four characters given below, choose t=the one that best describes the two statements

  1. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.
  2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1
  3. Statement I is true, and statement 2 is false
  4. Statement 1 is false statement 2 is true

Question 1. 

Statement 1: The Greater the refractive index of a medium or denser the medium, the lesser the velocity of light In that medium

Statement 2: Refractive index is inversely proportional to velocity.

Answer: 1.  Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 2.

Statement 1: The critical angle of the light passing from glass to is minimal for violet colour

Statement 2: The wavelength of violet light is greater than the light of other colours

Answer: 3. Statement I is true, and statement 2 is false

Question 3.

Statement 1: The twinkling of the star is due to the reflection of light

Statement 2: The velocity of light changes while going from one medium to the other.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false statement 2 is true

Question 4.

Statement 1: The relative refractive index of a medium can be less than unity.

Statement 2: The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of refraction

Answer: 3. Statement I is true, and statement 2 is false

Question 5.

Starement 1: When a ra> of light enters glass from atr. Its frequency changes

Sutrmem 2: The velocity of light in glass is less than that in oil.

Answer: 4. Statement 1 is false statement 2 is true

Question 6.

Statement 1: The refractive index of a medium Is Inversely proportional to temperature

Statement 2: Refractive index U is directly proportional to the density of the medium.

Answer: 2. Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is not a correct explanation for statement 1

Question 7. 

Statement 1: The velocity of light rays* of different colours is the same. But the velocity of the light rays is different for anv another medium.

Statement 2: If v = velocity of light in the respective

Answer: 1.  Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Question 8.

Statement 1: The linages formed the total lniern.il reflections are much brighter than those formed by lenses.

Statement 2: There Is no loss of Intensity during total Internal reflection

Answer: 1.  Statement 1 is true, statement 2 is true, and statement 2 is a correct explanation for statement 1.

Refraction Of Light Match The Columns

Question 1. 

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Deviative Angles

Answer:  1- A, C, 2-A, C, 3- B, 4- 4, 5- A, C

Question 2.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Deviative Angles.

Answer: 1-C, D, 2- A, 3- B, E

Question 3.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Refractive Index Medium

Answer: 1- D, 2- A, 3- B, 4. C

μ1, μ2 and μ3 are the refractive indices of the first, second and third medium respectively

Question 4.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Square Roots

Answer: 1- B, 2-1, 3 -C

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Refraction Of Light Prism

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Prism Notes

Optics Refraction Of Light Prism Of Some Definitions

Prism:

A prism is a portion of a transparent medium confined using two plane faces inclined to each other. In the DEFGHK is a prism and it is confined by the two planes DEHK and DFGK.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Prism

Refracting face:

The two plane faces inclined to each P S other at some angle by which the prism is bound are called the refracting faces. In, DEHK and DFGK are the refracting faces. BL

Edge:

The line along which the two refracting faces meet is called the edge of the prism. In Rg. 2.42, the line DK is the ‘ edge of the prism.

Refracting angle or angle of the prism:

The angle included between the two refracting faces is called the refract¬ ing angle or simply the angle of the prism. In the figure, ZEDF is the angle of the prism.

Side face and base:

In general, besides two refracting surfaces, a prism further on is enclosed by three more surfaces. Among these surfaces, two surfaces are triangular and are
placed perpendicular to the edge of the prism.

Read and Learn More Class 12 Physics Notes

In these two surfaces are DEF and KHG. These are the side faces of the prism. Another one is rectangular and situated perpendicular to the side face. In the surface is EFGH. It is called the base of the prism

Principal section:

The triangular cross-section cut by a perpendicular plane at right angles to the edge of a prism is called a principal section of the prism In ABC is a principal section of the prism

Light can enter or emerge from the prism through its refracting surfaces as those surfaces are plain and smooth In some cases, the base and side faces of a prism are made rough so that no light passes through it A prism is usually represented by its principal section

Refraction of Light along the Principal Section of a Prism

In ABC is the principal section of a prism. AB and AC are the refracting faces and BC is the base of the prism. A ray PQ is an incident on the face AB at Q where NQO is the normal. The prism is supposed to be an optically denser medium with

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Principle Of The Prism

Respect to its surroundings. So, after refraction on plane AB, the refracted ray QR bends towards the normal NQO. The refracted ray QR is then incident on the face AC at H where N’RO is normal. The emergent ray RS bends av/ay from the normal N’RO after refraction.

So RQRS is the whole path of the ray of light. The angle between the direction of the incident ray and the direction of the’ emergent ray gives the angle of deviation. In, the angle of deviation, δ = ∠MTS.

WBCHSE class 12 physics prism notes Expression for the angle of deviation:

Let the angle of the prism = ∠BAC – A. For refraction on the face AB, the angle of incidence =∠PQN = i1, and the angle of refraction = ∠RQO = r1  for refraction on the face AC, the angle of incidence of QR = ∠QRO =r2, and the angle of refraction. = ∠N’RS =i2 .

Now we get from the ∠QRT, angle of deviation,

δ = ∠MTR = ∠TQR + ∠TRQ

= (i1 ~ r1) + (i2– r2) = i1 + i2– (r1+ r2) Now, from the quadrilateral AQOR, as NO and N’O are normals on AB and AC respectively, so A + ∠QOR = 180°.

Again, from the triangle QOR

∠QOR + r1 + r2 = 180°

∴ A = r1 + r2 and ……………………….(1)

δ  = i1 + i2-A ……………………….(2)

So the angle of deviation δ depends on the angle of incidence. From the principle of reversibility of light rays follows that, if a ray enters the face A C along SR at an angle of incidencei2 it will emerge along QP at an angle i1 and suffer the same deviation. In other words, the same deviation occurs for two values of i.

Angle of Minimum Deviation

‘The angle of deviation of a ray of light passing through a prism depends on the angle of incidence because in the relation

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Angle Of Minimum Deviation

WBBSE Class 12 Refraction Through Prism Notes

δ= i1 + i2– A, A is constant and i2 depends on i2 . A graph is drawn taking the angle of incidence z as abscissa and the angle of deviation o as ordinateThe graph indicates that the deviation decreases at first with the increase in the angle of incidence and then attains a minimum (δm) for a particular value of the angle of incidence i0. Then with a further increase in the angle of incidence, the; deviation also increases.

So for every prism, there is a fixed angle of incidence for which the deviation suffered by a ray of light traversing the prism minimal. This angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation of a prism. The position of the prism for which the value of the deviation becomes minimum is called the position of minimum deviation of the prism. This position of the prism is unique i.e., for only, one position of the particular prism, the deviation becomes minimal.

Class 11 Physics Class 12 Maths Class 11 Chemistry
NEET Foundation Class 12 Physics NEET Physics

Analysis of (i -δ) graph and condition of minimum deviation:

A line AB parallel to the i -i-axis is drawn. The coordinates of points, A and B are respectively (i1,  ) and (i2, δ ). The angle of deviation is o for an angle of incidence i1 or i2. We have seen that for angle of incidence i1 the emergent angle is z’2. The length of the line AB = (i2– i1). As the line AB moves parallel to itself downwards, the value of o decreases and the length of the line ( i2– i1) also decreases gradually. At point C, the length of the line AB becomes zero and o also becomes minimum. Then i2– i1 = 0 Or, i2= i1

So we can say that during refraction through a prism, when the angle of incidence and the angle of emergence are equal, the angle of deviation becomes minimal.

Condition of minimum deviation by calculus:

We know for refraction through a prism, the angle of deviation of a ray of light

Condition of minimum deviation by calculus: we know for refraction through a prism, the angle of deviation of a ray of light

δ = i1+i2-A ………………..(1)

And angle of the prism

A= r1 +r2 ………………..(2)

The angle of deviation 8 depends on the angle of incidence i1.

For minimum deviation δ

⇒ \(\frac{d}{d i_1}(\delta)=0\)

∴ \(\frac{d}{d i_1}\left(i_1+i_2-A\right)\) =0

Or, 1\(\frac{d i_2}{d i_1}\)

∴ \(\frac{d i_2}{d i_1}=-1\) ………………..(3)

Differentiating equation (2) we have,

⇒ \(\frac{d}{d r_1}(A)=\frac{d}{d r_1}\left(r_1+r_2\right)\)

⇒ \(0=1+\frac{d r_2}{d r_1} \quad \text { or, } \frac{d r_2}{d r_1}=-1\) ……………………(4)

For refraction at Q and R , according to Snell’s law we have, sin i1 = μ sin r1 and sin i2 = μ sin r2; where μ = refractive index of the. material of the prism.

Differentiating the above equations we have

⇒ \(\cos i_1 d i_1=\mu \cos r_1 d r_1 \quad \text { and } \cos i_2 d i_2=\mu \cos r_2 d r_2\)

∴  \(\frac{\cos i_1}{\cos i_2} \cdot \frac{d i_1}{d i_2}=\frac{\cos r_1}{\cos r_2} \cdot \frac{d r_1}{d r_2}\)  ………………………………(5)

From equations (3), (4) and (5) we have

⇒ \(\frac{\cos i_1}{\cos i_2}=\frac{\cos r_1}{\cos r_2^2} \quad \text { or, } \frac{\cos ^2 i_1}{\cos ^2 i_2}=\frac{\cos ^2 r_1}{\cos ^2 r_2}\)

Or, \(\frac{1-\sin ^2 i_1}{1-\sin ^2 i_2}=\frac{1-\sin ^2 r_1}{1-\sin ^2 r_2}\)

Or, \(\frac{1-\sin ^2 i_1}{1-\sin ^2 i_2}=\frac{\mu^2-\mu^2 \sin ^2 r_1}{\mu^2-\mu^2 \sin ^2 r_2}=\frac{\mu^2-\sin ^2 i_1}{\mu^2-\sin ^2 i_2}\)

Or, \(\frac{1-\sin ^2 i_1}{1-\sin ^2 i_2}=\frac{\left(\mu^2-\sin ^2 i_1\right)-\left(1-\sin ^2 i_1\right)}{\left(\mu^2-\sin ^2 i_2\right)-\left(1-\sin ^2 i_2\right)}\)

\(\frac{a}{b}=\frac{c}{d}=\frac{c-a}{d-b}\)

= \(\frac{\mu^2-1}{\mu^2-1}\)

= 1

∴ \(1-\sin ^2 i_1=1-\sin ^2 i_2 \quad \text { or, } \sin ^2 i_1=\sin ^2 i_2\)

Or, i1 =  i2

So the deviation is minimal when the angle of incidence (i1) is equal to the angle of emergence (i2)

WBCHSE Class 12 Physics Notes For Refraction Of Light Prism

The brightness of a ray of light at minimum deviation:

From the graph of the angle of incidence i and angle of deviation δ, it is found that generally if the angle of incidence is different, the angle of deviation is also different.

But if the angle of deviation attains its minimum value δm, then it is observed that for a wider range of angle of incidence (from i1 to  i2 vide, the angle of deviation of the ray becomes almost equal to the angle of minimum deviation δm, i.e., all the rays within this range emerge from the prism making a minimum angle of deviation δm.

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Brightness Of A Ray Of Light At Minimum Deviation

So it can be said that in case of minimum deviation, the brightness of the emergent ray increases considerably. For this characteristic, the minimum deviation of a prism is of great importance

Path of Ray through a Prism for Minimum Deviation

Suppose a ray of light passes through a prism with minimum deviation along the path PQRS According to the condition of minimum deviation ix = i2. If the refractive index of the material of the prism is then

Class 12 Physics Unit 6 Optics Chapter 2 Refraction Of Light Path Of Ray A prism For Minimum Deviation

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}=\frac{\sin i_2}{\sin r_2}\)

r1 = r2

Since ∠AQR = 90°- r1 and ∠ARQ = 90°- r2 ,

So ∠AQR = ∠ARQ

Since, [r1 = r2]

So the triangle AQR is an isosceles triangle having AQ = AR.

So, for the minimum deviation of a ray, the point of incidence, Q and the point of emergence, R are equidistant from the vertex A of the prism.

So it is evident that when the deviation of a ray in a prism is minimum, the path of the ray through the prism becomes symmetrical.

Suppose, for the prism, AB = AC

∴ AQ= AR

∴ \(\frac{A Q}{A B}=\frac{A R}{A C}\)

i.e., the line QR is parallel to BC.

So, for an isosceles prism, when the deviation is minimum the path of the ray through the prism becomes parallel to the base of the prism.

Again the deviation of the ray due to refraction at AB = ( i1 – i2) and the deviation of the ray due to refraction at AC = ( i2 – i1). At the position of the minimum deviation of the prism,  i1= i2 and r1 = r2. So the deviations stated earlier become equal. Therefore, we can say that at the minimum deviation position of the prism, the total deviation is divided equally between the two refracting faces of the prism.

Short Notes on Dispersion by Prism

Refractive Index And Angle Of Minimum Deviation

We know that In the case of refraction of a prism, the angle of deviation of a ray δ = i1+ i2 = And the angle of the prism  A = r1 + r

For minimum deviation r1 = r2. , Again when i1 =  i2 then r1+ r2

So angle of minimum deviation

δm = i1+i2– A   = 2i1– A

Or, \(=\frac{A+\delta_{m}}{2}\)

Again, A = r1+r2 = 2r1

Now considering refraction at the face AB we have, angle of incidence = i1 and angle of refraction = r1

If the refractive index of the material of the prism is μ then

⇒ \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}=\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

So, If we know the values of the angle of the prism μ, and the angle of minimum deviation δ , we can determine the value of the refractive Index of the material of the prism

Refraction Through Prism Class 12 Notes

Refraction Of Light Prism Of Some Definitions Numerical Examples

Example 1.  The refractive index of the material of a prism Is \(\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}}\) and the refracting angle Is 90°. of the angle of minimum deviation of the prism and the angle of Incidence at the minimum deviation position.
Solution:

Here A = 90°: Let the angle of the minimum deviation be m

We know, μ = \(\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}=\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}\)

⇒ \(\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}}=\frac{\sin \frac{90^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{90^{\circ}}{2}}=\frac{\sin \frac{90^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin 45^{\circ}}\)

Or, \(\sin \frac{90^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}=\sqrt{\frac{3}{2}} \times \sin 45^{\circ}\)

= \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{\sqrt{2}} \times \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

⇒ \(i_1=\frac{90^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}=60^{\circ}\)

Or, 90° + δm = 120°

δm = 120°- 90°

δm = 30°

⇒ \(r_1=\frac{A}{2}=\frac{90^{\circ}}{2}\)

= 45°

Class 12 physics prism refraction notes 

Example 2. The refractive of the material of a prism is \(\sqrt{2}\) and the angle of minimum deviation is 30. Calculate the value of the refracting angle of the prism.
solution:

Let the refracting angle of the prism be A We know, \(\)

⇒  \(\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

Or, = \(\sqrt{2}=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+30^{\circ}}{2}\right)}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

Or, \(\sqrt{2} \cdot \sin \frac{A}{2}=\sin \left(15^{\circ}+\frac{A}{2}\right)\)

= \(\sin 15^{\circ} \cdot \cos \frac{A}{2}+\cos 15^{\circ} \cdot \sin \frac{A}{2}\)

⇒ \(\frac{\sin \frac{A}{2}}{\cos \frac{A}{2}}=\frac{\sin 15^{\circ}}{\sqrt{2}-\cos 15^{\circ}}\)

Now, \(\sin 15^{\circ}=\sin \left(45^{\circ}-30^{\circ}\right)\)

= \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \cdot \frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}-\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}} \cdot \frac{1}{2}=\frac{\sqrt{3}-1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

Similarly , Cos 15°  \(\frac{\sqrt{3}+1}{2 \sqrt{2}}\)

∴ \(\tan \frac{A}{2}=\frac{\frac{\sqrt{3}-1}{2 \sqrt{2}}}{\sqrt{2}-\frac{\sqrt{3}+1}{2 \sqrt{2}}}\)

= \(\frac{\sqrt{3}-1}{3-\sqrt{3}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)

= tan 30°

\(\frac{\Lambda}{2}\) = 30°

Or, A= 60°

Common Questions on Light Refraction in Prisms

Example 3. The angle of minimum deviation is the same as the angle of a glass prism of refractive index = \(\sqrt{3}\). What is the angle of the prism
Solution:

According to the question,  δm = A

⇒ \(\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

Or, \(=\frac{\sin \frac{A+A}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}=\frac{\sin A}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

= \(\frac{2 \sin \frac{A}{2} \cos \frac{A}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}=2 \cos \frac{A}{2}\)

μ = \(\sqrt{3}\)

So, \(2 \cos \frac{A}{2}=\sqrt{3}\)

Or, \(\cos \frac{A}{2}=\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\) = cos 30°

Or, \(\frac{A}{2}=30^{\circ}\)

A = 30° × 2

A = 60°

Example 4. What- will be the angle of emergence of a ray of light -; n through a prism for an angle of incidence of 45°? The angle of the prism = 60°; refractive index of the prism = \(\sqrt{3}\)
Solution:

Here A = 60 ,μ =  \(\sqrt{3}\)

For refraction at the first face

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}\)

Or, \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}\)

Or, \(\sqrt{2}\)

Or, r1 =  30°

We know, that A = r1+r2

r2= A-r1 = 60°-30° = 30° = r1

So, the angle of emergence (i2) = angle of incidence (i1) = 45° The angle of emergence of the ray of light from the second face is 45°

Example 5. A ray of— light is incident at an angle- of- incidence- 40°—- on a prism having a refractive index of 1.6. What should be the value of the angle of the prism for minimum deviation? Given sin 40° = 0.6428; sin23°42; = 0.4018
Solution:

Here  μ = 1.6

The angle of incidence at the first face = i1 = 40

Let the angle of emergence at the second fac

For minimum deviation i1 = i2= 40

⇒ \(\delta_m=i_1+i_2-A=40^{\circ}+40^{\circ}-A\)

or, \(A+\delta_{m_1}=80^{\circ}\)

We know, \(\mu=\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}} \text { or, } 1.6=\frac{\sin \frac{80^{\circ}}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

or, \(\sin \frac{A}{2}=\frac{\sin 40^{\circ}}{1.6}=\frac{0.6428}{1.6}\)

= 0.4018= sin 23°42′

\(\frac{A}{2}\) = 23°42′

A = 23°42′ × 2

Or, A = 47° 24′

Practice Problems on Prism Refraction Angles

Example 6. The refracting angle of the n glass prism is 60° and the refractive Index of glass is 1.6 The angle of incidence of a ray of light on the first refracting surface is 45°. Calculate the angle of deviation of the ray. Given that sin 26°14′ = 0.4419, sin 33°46′ = 0.5558 and sin 62°47′ = 0.8893 .
Solution:

Here A = 60°; ft – 1.6

The angle of incidence on the first face = i1 = 45

For refraction on the first face, ft = \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}\)

⇒ \(\sin r_1=\frac{\sin t_1}{\mu}=\frac{\sin 45^{\circ}}{1.6}\)

= \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2} \times 1.6}\)

= 0.4419

= sin 26.23°

Or, r1 = 26.23°

We, know A = r1 +r2

r2 = A- r1 = 60°- 26.23° = 33.77°

For refraction at the second face

⇒ \(\frac{\sin i_2}{\sin r_2}\)

Or, sin =1.6 \(\frac{\sin i_2}{\sin 33.77^{\circ}}\)

Or, sin i2 = 1.6 × sin 33.77°

= 1.6 × 0.5559 = 0.8894

= sin 62.8°

i2 = 62.8°

So, the angle of deviation,

δ = i1 + i2-A = 45° + 62.8°- 60°

= 47.8°

Example 7.  If the refracting angle of a prism is A, the refractive index of its material is fi and the angle of deviation of a ray of light Incident normally on the first refracting face is 8, then prove that ft
Solution:

The angle of deviation for refraction in the prism,

δ = i1 + i -A and A = r1 + r2

For normal incidence ix = 0 and rx = 0

∴ δ  = i2-A Or, i2 = A + δ

A = r2

The refractive index of the prism,

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_2}{\sin r_2}=\frac{\sin (A+\delta)}{\sin A}\)

Refraction through prism class 12 notes 

Example 8.  A ray of light Is an Incident at an angle of 60° a prism with a refracting angle 30°. If any emerges from the other face and makes an angle of 30° with the Incident ray then, show that the emergent ray passes perpendicularly through the refracting surface. Determine the refractive Index of the material of the prism.
Solution:

According to question’, δ = 30°, i1=6 0° and

A = 30°.

We know, δ = i1 + i2-A

∴ 30° = 60° + i1– 30° or, i2 = 0

The emergent ray Is perpendicular to the refracting surface.

Again, A = r2 + r1

As, i1 = 0 , so angle of incidence of the second face, r2 = 0

r1 = A = 30°

∴ The refractive index of the material of the prism

μ = \(\frac{\sin i_1}{\sin r_1}=\frac{\sin 60^{\circ}}{\sin 30^{\circ}}=\frac{\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}}{\frac{1}{2}}\)

= \(\sqrt{3}\)

Refraction of light prism class 12 Important Definitions Related to Prism Refraction

Example 9. A glass prism with a refracting angle of 60° and of refractive index 1.6, is immersed in water (refractive Index is 1.33). What is its angle of minimum deviation? [sin 36.87° = 0.6
Solution:

Here, A = 60°; aμb = 1.6; aμw =1.33

⇒ \({ }_w \mu_g=\frac{{ }_a \mu_g}{{ }_a \mu_w}=\frac{1.6}{1.33}\)

= 1.2

Let the angle of minimum deviation for the immersed prism is

⇒ \(w^{\mu_g}=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}]\)

Or, \(1.2=\frac{\sin \left(\frac{60^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}\right)}{\sin \frac{60^{\circ}}{2}}\)

Or, \(1.2 \times \sin 30^{\circ}=\sin \frac{60^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}\)

Or, \(\sin \frac{60^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}=1.2 \times \frac{1}{2}\)

= 0.6 = sin 36. 87

Or, \(\frac{60^{\circ}+\delta_m}{2}\) = 36.87

Or, \(\delta_m=73.74^{\circ}-60^{\circ}=13.74^{\circ}\)

Example 10. A ray of light passes through an equilateral prism In such a way triangle of incidence becomes equal to the angle of emergence and each of these angles is \(\frac{3}{4}\) of the angle of deviation. Determine the angle of deviation.
Solution:

Here, A= 60 and i1= i2= \(\frac{3}{4} \delta\)

Now \(\)

= \(\frac{3}{2} \delta-60^{\circ}\)

Or, \(\frac{1}{2} \delta=60^{\circ}\)

Or = 120

∴ Angle od deviation = 120

Refraction of light prism class 12 Examples of Applications of Prisms in Optics

Example. 11  The angle of minimum deviation of a glass prism of refracting angle 60° is 30°. If the velocity of light In a vacuum is 3 × 10-8m s-1, then determine Its velocity In the glass
Solution:

The refractive index of the material of the prism,

μ =\(\frac{\sin \frac{A+\delta_m}{2}}{\sin \frac{A}{2}}\)

μ = \(\frac{\sin \frac{60^{\circ}+30^{\circ}}{2}}{\sin \frac{60^{\circ}}{2}}=\frac{\sin 45^{\circ}}{\sin 30^{\circ}}\)

= \(\frac{\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}}{\frac{1}{2}}=\sqrt{2}\)

Again , \(\mu=\frac{\text { velocity of light in vacuum }}{\text { velocity of light in glass }\left(\nu_g\right)}\)

⇒ \(\sqrt{2}=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{v_g}\)

⇒  \(v_g=\frac{3 \times 10^8}{\sqrt{2}}=2.12 \times 10^8 \mathrm{~m} \cdot \mathrm{s}^{-1}\)